BOOKS  BY 

H.  C.  TOLMAN,  Ph.  D.,  M.  R.  A.  S, 


LATIN. 

CAESAR'S  GALLIC  WAR.  Eight  books.  By  William  R.^iney 
Harper,  Ph.  D.,  President  of  the  University  of  Chicago  (late  of 
Yale  University),  and  Herbert  Cushing  Tolman,  Ph.  D.,  of  the 
University  of  Wisconsin  (late  of  Yale  University).  i2mo,  full  cloth, 
502  pages.     Price,  $1.20. 

Syracuse  University,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
The  men  from  whom  this  book  emanates,  are  a  strong  recommendation  at 
the  outset.    I  think  any  person,  whether  a  preparatory  student  or  a  post-grad- 
uate, could  get  great  benefit  from  a  careful  study  of  .this  book I  should 

greatly  enjoy  putting  a  college. class  through  the  work.  I  think  your  book 
a  fine  addition  to  text-books  for  College  Preparatory  Schools,  and  shall  not  hes- 
itate to  recommend  it  as  occasion  may  arise.  Frank  Smalley,  A.  M., 

Professor  of  Latin. 

Princeton  College,  Princeton,  N.J. 
Its  peculiar  features,  ingenious  and  scholarly,  are  admirably  fitted  to  thor- 
oughly interest  the  young  student It  is  altogether  the  best  book  in  every 

thing  the  teacher  and  pupil  can  wish  for.  Wm.  A.  Packard,  Ph.  D., 

Professor  of  Latin. 

Centre  High  School,  Northampton,  Mass, 
A  year's  course  in  teaching  from  Harper  and  Tolman's  Caesar  will  do  as 
much  good  to  an  inexperienced  teacher  of  the  classics  as  it  will  do  to  the  stu- 
dent who  is  taught.  Clarence  B.  Roote, 

Principal  and  Teacher  of  Latin. 

"Wir  sehen,  das  Buch  ist  reichhaltig  und  planmassig  angelegt.  Fiir  die 
amerikanischen  Studenten  ist  es  gewiss  sehr  brauchbar,  .  .  .  ." — Rud.  Menge, 
in  Berliner  Philologische  IVochenschrifl. 


PERSIAN. 

A  GUIDE  TO  THE  OLD  PERSIAN  INSCRIPTIONS.  By 
Herbert  Cushing  Tolman,  Ph.  D.,  M.  R.  A.  S.  i6mo,  full  cloth, 
186  pages.     Price,  $1.50. 

"Professor  Tolman  gives  in  forty-two  pages  the  grammatical  elements, 
including  a  classification  of  all  the  best  forms  which  occur  in  the  inscriptions. 
We  gladly  welcome  this  contribution  to  American  scholarship,  and  we  hope 
that  other  scholars  may  follow  the  example  set  by  Professors  Jackson,  Lyon, 
Haupt,  Tolman  and  others." —  The  Biblia. 


AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY, 

NKW  YORK    .-.    CINCINNATI    .'.    CHICAGO    .-.     BOSTON    .'.    ATLANTA 


THE   BEHISTAN    MOUNTAIN. 


A  GUIDE 


TO  THE 


OLD  PERSIAN 


INSCRIPTIONS 


HERBERT  GUSHING  TOLMAN,  Ph.  D.  (vale) 


FOREIGN  MEMBER  OF  THE  ROYAL  ASIATIC  SOCIETY  OF  GREAT  BRITAIN 

AND   IRELAND  ;    ASSISTANT   PROFESSOR  OF  SANSKRIT   IN   THE 

UNIVERSITY   OF   WISCONSIN 


N^W  YORK    /.    CINCINNATI    .'.    CHICAGO    .'.    BOSTON    .*.    ATLANTA 
A.MERICAN   BOOK   COMPANY 


Copyright,  1803,  by  H.  C.  Tolman. 


Typcgraphy  by  Tracy,  Gibbs  &  Co.,  Madison,  Wi«. 


TO 

MY  HONORED  TEACHER, 

WILLIAM  D WIGHT   WHITNEY,  Ph.  Z>.,  LL.  D, 

under  whose  instruction  and  guidance  were  spent  five 
years  of  my  study  in  the  Sanskrit  language^ 

this  volume  is 

RESPE  CTFULL  Y  DEDICA  TED. 


86278 


TO    THE    READER. 


This  book  does  not  claim  to  be  a  contribution  to  Iranian  subjects. 
In  these  recent  years  there  has  been  such  an  advancement  in  this  line 
of  scholarship  that  Sanskrit  students  have  been  compelled  to  surrend- 
er this  field  to  specialists  among  whom  in  America  the  name  of  Dr. 
A.  V.  Williams  Jackson  of  Columbia  College  is  conspicio  is.  In  1862 
Haug  published  an  outline  of  Avesta  grammar  in  the  first  edition  of 
his  essays.  At  that  time  seventy  octavo  pages  were  sufficient  to  con- 
tain the  discovered  material.  Two  years  later  Justi's  grammar  of 
one  hundred  and  fifteen  octavo  pages  was  looked  upon  as  practically 
exhaustive.  The  grammar  of  Spiegel  appeared  in  1867,  that  of  de 
Harlez  in  1878,  that  of  Geiger  in  1879.  Kavasji  Edalji's  grammar 
(1 89 1)  and  Jackson's  grammar  (1892)  extend  four  fold  the  horizon  of 
Avestan  scholarship  as  contrasted  with  the  outline  presented  by 
Haug  thirty  years  before,  although  the  same  quantity  of  text  of  the 
Avesta  is  the  basis  for  grammatical  work.  This  statement  can  enable 
the  reader  to  realize  the  great  strides  this  study  has  made  during  a 
few  years.  My  work  in  the  Zend  Avesta  and  in  the  dialects  of  Per- 
sia has  been  simply  an  avocation  from  my  chosen  field  of  Sanskrit. 

No  book  has  been  published  in  English  containing  the  grammar, 
text  and  vocabulary  of  all  the  Old  Persian  Inscriptions.  It  was  this 
fact  that  induced  the  author  in  1891  to  issue  a  little  volume  entitled 
"Old  Persian  Grammar"  the  copies  of  which  have  now  been  sold. 
The  first  fifty  pages  of  the  present  volume,  which  contain  the  gram- 
matical principles,  are  based  on  this  work. 

The  following  features  characterize  this  volume  on  Old  Persian 
Inscriptions. 

(I.)  The  grammatical  principles  arranged  as  a  grammar  of  the 
language. 

(2. )  The  complete  classification  of  all  the  verb-forms  occurring  in 
the  inscriptions. 

(3.)  The  transliterated  text.  The  portion  supplied  by  conjecture 
has  been  inserted  without  brackets  unless  the  conjectural  reading  be 
doubtful. 


(4.)  The  references  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  in  the  text  which  call 
ihe  attention  of  the  student  to  the  grammar  on  the  first  occurrence  of 
a  form  or  principle. 

(5.)  The  cuneiform  text. 

(6.)  The  translation. 

(7.)  The  vocabulary  giving  the  related  words  in  Sanskrit,  Latin, 
Gothic,  Anglo-Saxon,  etc. 

The  author  recommends  to  the  reader  the  following  books  as  being 
of  interest  in  the  history  of  the  early  decipherment  of  the  inscriptions: 

(I.)  Die  altpersischen  Keilinschriften  nach  Hrn.  Westergaards 
Mittheilungen.  Zeitschrift  fiir  die  Kunde  des  Morgenlandes  heraus- 
gegeben  von  Dr.  Christian  Lassen.     Leipzig,  1845. 

(2.)  Die  persischen  Keilinschriften  mit  Uebersetzung  und  Glossar 
von  Theodor  Benfrey.     Leipzig,  1847. 

{3.)  The  Journal  of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society  of  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland,  Vol.  X,  by  H.  C.  Rawlinson.    London,  1847.         ** 

(4.)  Memoire  sur  les  inscriptions  des  Achem^nides,  con?ues  dans  1' 
idiome  des  anciens  Persans,  par  M.  Oppert.  Journal  Asiatique  ou 
recueil  de  memoires  d'  extraits  et  de  notices  relatifs  ei  1'  histoire,  k 
la  philosophic,  aux  langues  et  k  la  litterature  des  peuples  orientaux. 
Paris,  1 85 1.  1852. 

(5.)  Expedition  scientifique  en  Mesopotamie  ex^cut^e  par  ordre  du 
Gouvernement  de  185 1  i  1854  par  MM.  Fulgence  Fresnel,  Felix 
Thomas  et  Jules  Oppert,  T.  II.  pp.  154-256. 

(6.)  Memoir  on  the  Scythic  Version  of  the  Behistan  Inscription  by 
Edwin  Norris,  M.  R.  A.  S.  (Journal  of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society,  Vol. 
XV,  1855.) 

(7.)  Memoire  sur  les  rapports  de  1'  Egypte  et  de  1'  Assyrie  dans  V 
antiquity  ^claircis  par  1'  ^tude  des  textes  cuneiformes,  par  M.  Jules 
Oppert.     Paris,  1869. 

(8.)  Die  altpersischen  Keilinschriften  im  Grundtexte  mit  Ueber- 
setzung.    Fr.  Spiegel,  Leipzig,  (two  editions). 

(9.)  Zur  Erklarung  der  altpersischen  Keilinschriften  von  Dr.  H. 
Kern.  Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft, 
Band  XXIII,  1869. 

(10.)  Inscriptiones  Palaeo-Persicae.  Cajetan  Kossowicz,  St.  Peters- 
burg, 1872. 


In  my  references  to  foreign  journals,  I  have  used  abbreviations  as 
little  as  possible.  They  are  mostly  of  the  nature  of  the  following  and 
need  not  be  explained. 

ZDMG.  =Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  morgenVdndischen  Gesellshaft\  f. 
vergl.  Sprachforsch.=:fur  vergleichende  Sprachforsckung;  idg.-=:indo- 
germanische;  ai.^:^altindische;    Wb.^Worterbuch,  etc.,  etc. 

The  author  is  aware  of  the  many  faults  this  book  contains  as  fully 
as  the  severest  critic  can  be,  and  he  shall  be  glad  to  receive  all  sug- 
gestions which  may  make  it  more  useful  to  the  reader, 

Herbert  Gushing  Tolman. 

Madison,  Wisconsin,  November  4th,    1892. 


TABIvK  OK  CONTENTS. 


Grammar,            _..--_.  5 

Verb-Forms,              ._--..  48 

Inscriptions,       -------  53 

Cuneiform  Text,     -            -            -            -            -      *     -  93 

Translation,             -            -            -            -            -            -  115 

Vocabulary,       -------  161 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


AOR., 

A.  S.. 

AVEST 

CF., 

ENG., 

GERM., 

GOTH., 

IMPF., 

IMPV.. 


-      Aorist  INF., 

Anglo  Saxon  LAT., 

Avestan  PART. 

Compare  PERF. 

English  PRES.. 

-    German  SKT., 

Gothic  SLAV., 


■  Infinitive 

-   Latin 

Participle 

Perfect 

Present 

Sanskrit 

Slavonic 


Imperfect      I.S.,  etc.,  1st  person  singular, etc. 
Imperative      1.  P.,  etc.,  1st  person  plural,  etc. 


GRAMMAR. 


PREFACE. 


The  Old  Persian  language  deserves  a  larger  place  in 
American  scholarship  than  it  has  yet  received.  Here- 
tofore the  work  has  been  left  entirely  to  European 
scholars,  and  it  is  due  to  a  desire  to  awaken  an  inter- 
est in  this  old  tongue  among  scholars  of  our  own 
country  that  this  little  book  has  come  into  existence. 
I  take  the  opportunity  of  expressing  my  gratitude  to 
my  pupil,  WoLCOTT  Webster  Ellsworth,  a  gradu- 
ate of  Yale  and  a  member  of  the  American  Oriental 
Society,  for  help  furnished  me.  He  has  taken  my 
manuscript,  which  was  in  most  part  in  the  form  of  lec- 
tures, and  arranged  the  whole  work  for  the  press.  He 
also  rendered  much  service  in  the  transliteration  of  the 
cuneiform  text. 

I  shall  gladly  receive  all  suggestions  or  corrections 
which  may  make  this  volume  more  helpful  in  impart- 
ing enthusiasm  in  the  study  of  this  our  sister  tongue. 

H.  C.  T. 

New  HaveUj  Conn.y  June^  i8gi. 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 

The  copies  of  the  first  edition  are  exhausted.  The 
author  has  taken  this  opportunity  to  revise  and  am- 
plify the  whole  work.  He  wishes  to  express  his  grati- 
fication for  the  kind  reception  the  previous  edition  has 
received  and  also  to  make  acknowledgment  of  many 
valuable  suggestions.  H.  C.  T. 

Madison,   Wis.y  Aug.,  i8p2. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Professor  Grotefend  was  the  pioneer  in  the  decipher- 
ment of  the  cuneiform  text.  His  first  discovery  was 
announced  in  the  Literary  Gazette  of  Gottingen,  in  the 
year  1802.  About  one-third  of  the  Old  Persian 
alphabet  was  determined  by  his  transliteration  of 
the  names  of  Cyrus,  Darius,  Xerxes  and  Hystas- 
pes.  Professor  Rask  added  to  this  number  the 
two  characters  representing  M  and  N.  A  memoir 
of  M.  Burnouf  published  in  June,  1836,  and  a  work 
Ox  Professor  Lassen  published  at  Bonn  in  May,  1836, 
entitled  Die  Alt-Persischen  Keil-Inschriften  von  Per- 
sepolis,  furnished  a  true  determination  of  twelve  addi- 
tional characters.  Dr.  Beer,  of  Leipzig,  in  a  review 
published  in  Allgemein.  Hall.  Literat.  Zeitung  in  the 
year  1838,  announced  the  discovery  of  the  two  char- 
acters for  H  and  Y.  M.  Jacquet  is  said  to  have  made 
the  same  discoveries  independently  at  Paris,  and  also 
identified  the  equivalents  for  C  and  JH. 

It  is  evident  that  a  cursive  style  of  writing  was  em- 
ployed for  epistolary  purposes  and  had  an  existence 
contemporaneous  with  the  cuneiform,  since  the  char- 
acter of  the  latter  rendered  it  fit  only  for  lapidary  uses, 
[Cf.  Daniel  VI,  9;  Nehemiah  II,  9;  Herodotus  VII, 
100.].  No  Persian  cuneiform  writing  appears  after  the 
time  of  Artaxerxes  Ochus,  and  we  are  safe  in  say- 
ing that  it  died  out  at  the  end  of  the  rule  of  the 
Achsemenian  kings. 

The  oldest  inscription  is  that  of  Cyrus  the  Great, 
which  perhaps  may  be  his  sepulchral  inscription  although 
the  epitaph  quoted  by  Strabo  and  Ctesias  differs  from 
the  one  on  this  Old  Persian  monument.     The  latest  is 


the  inscription  of  Artaxerxes  Ochus  which  exhibits 
many  peculiarities  of  grammatical  structure  indicating 
the  decay  of  the  language.  In  this  inscription  two 
compound  characters  for  BUM  and  DAH  are  intro- 
duced (cf.  Cuneiform  alphabet);  also  before  this  time 
in  the  tablets  of  Xerxes  appears  an  ideogram  for 
KHSHAY^THIY^,  due  undoubtedly  to  Semitic  in- 
fluences. 

The  most  important  of  the  inscriptions  is  the  great 
inscription  of  Darius  carved  upon  the  sacred  mountain 
Behistan  [BAGA  and  ST^N^  />lace  of  God].  This 
immense  rock  rose  to  a  perpendicular  height  of  1700 
feet  from  the  plain  below.  On  this  conspicuous  place 
Darius  Hystaspes  caused  to  be  inscribed  the  history 
of  his  reign  to  be  a  legacy  to  succeeding  generations. 
The  figures  of  Darius  and  his  attendants  are  executed 
with  considerable  skill,  yet  inferior  to  that  shown  in 
the  bas-reliefs  of  Persepolis.  Before  Darius  stand 
nine  usurpers  to  the  throne  bound  with  a  cord  about 
their  necks,  while  under  the  foot  of  the  king  lies  the 
prostrate  form  of  another.  These  are  intentionally  of 
rude  design  and  small  stature.  Above  the  picture  is 
the  efifigy  of  the  Persian  god  Auramazda. 

The  Old  Persian  language  is  most  closely  related  to 
the  Vedic  dialect  of  the  Sanskrit,  yet  the  interpretation 
of  the  inscriptions  depends  upon  the  combined  aid  of  the 
Sanskrit  and  Avestan  together  with  the  surviving  dia- 
lects of  Persia  which  have  been  in  any  degree  faithful 
to  their  mother  tongue.  Where  the  cognate  or  deriva- 
tive word  fails  to  appear  in  them,  an  arbitrary  mean- 
ing must  be  assigned  to  the  Old  Persian  to  suit  the  con- 
text; hence  I  have  given  in  the  vocabulary  the  authority 
of  the  related  languages  for  the  signification  of  each 
word,  wherever  such  authority  can  be  obtained. 


TJNIVERSITT 


GRAMIVEAR. 


PART  I. 

EUPHONY. 

I.  A  conventional  arrangement  of  the  European 
letters,  transliterating  the  Old  Persian  cuneiform  char- 
acters, is  as  follows: 

I  guttural,  a,  a. 
Vowels,  simple  •<  palatal,  i. 
(  labial,   u. 

Diphthongs  \  P^'!^'f '-  ^''  ^'- 
^  ^     (  labial,  auy  au. 

SURD.   SURD  ASP.  SONANT.  NASAL. 

^  guttural,  k  kh         g       — 

palatal,    c  —         j        — 

dental,     t  th  d        n 

labial,      p  f  b       m 

(  palatal,  y. 
Semivowels  •<  lingual,  r. 
(  labial,   v. 
j  lingual,  sh. 
I  dental,  s. 
Aspiration,  h. 
Note  i.   The  short  a  has  no  written  sign  (in  the 
cuneiform  text)  unless  it  be  initial.    Therefore  a  (italic) 
has  been  used  for  this  vowel  in  the  transliteration.    But 
when  it  is  initial  the  same  sign  is  employed  for  short 
a  as  for  long  a  (vide  infra),  since  the  native  characters 
make  no  distinction;   e.  g.,  ad<3;m 

Note  2.  The  long  a  is  transliterated  in  all  cases  by 
a  simple  a  (in  Roman  type),    e.  g.,  Pars^. 


Sibilants 


12 


EUPHONIC  COMBINATION. 


2.  Two  similar  vowels  coalesce,  forming  the  cor- 
responding long  vowel;  thus,  p^sav^  for  pasa,  and 
av^. 

Actual  examples  can  be  cited  of  no  vowels  coalescing  except  a-vow- 
els,  yet  undoubtedly  should  other  successive  vowels  occur,  they  would 
suffer  the  above  treatment. 

3.  The  short  a  combines  with  a  following  i-vowel  and 

u-vowel  to   ai   and  au  respectively;  thus,  Pars^iy  for 

Pars<^  4-  iy;  the  long  a  to  ai  and  au;  thus,  aniyauva 

for  aniya  -f-  uva. 

Note.  An  example  of  a  and  i  forming  ai  (as  in  the  Sanskrit  the 
long  a  and  i  combine  into  e  [ai]  )  instead  of  ai,  is  found  in  the  com- 
pound partita  for  p«ra  and  ita. 

4.  An  i-vowel  and  u-vowel  interpose  their  cor- 
responding semivowel  before  a  dissimilar  vowel;  thus, 
bumiya,  bumi  -f  a;  isuvam,  isu  -|-  am.  Sometimes, 
however,  the  vowel  is  converted  into  its  semivowel 
(especially  if  it  be  the  final  vowel  of  a  diphthong);  thus, 
ab^v^,  for  ab^u  +  a. 

For  exception,  cf.  dnraiapiy. 

5.  No  vowel  (except  a  and  a)  nor  diphthong  can 
end  a  word.  There  is  inserted  as  a  protection  the 
corresponding  semivowel;  thus,  up^riy,  for  up<3:n; 
patuv,  for  patu;  Pars^iy,  for  Pars^i. 

Note  i.     An  exception  seems  to  be  adari  (NRa). 
Note  2.     Hau  retains  the  v  even   before   ci,    mai,  and   tai;   e.    g. 
hrtuvci  (I).     Also  occur  p«ruvnam,  p«ruvz«nanam. 

6.  Final  a  is  sometimes  made  short  before  an  en- 
clitic; thus,  av<2d^shim,  for  av^dashim;  m^n^ca,  for 
m<3:naca.  Many  examples  remain,  however,  of  the 
long  a  preserved;  thus,  utam<3;iy,  y^thasham,  etc. 

7.  The  semivowel  is  often  connected  with  a  pre- 
ceding consonant  by  its  corresponding  vowel;  thus, 
adurujiy^,  for  adurujy^. 


13 

8.  A  root  is  often  expanded  by  vowel-insertion; 
thus,  duruj,  for  druj  (Skt.  druh). 

9.  Every  Old  Persian  word  must  end  in  sh,  m,  an 

a-vowel,  or  a  semivowel.  Should  any  other  letters 
stand  as  finals  etymologically,  they  are  dropped;  thus 
3.]a,  for  aj^nt. 

10.  The  dental  S,  when  preceded  by  any  vowel 
except  a  and  a,  is  changed  into  the  lingual  sh;  thus, 
Dar<3;y<3:vush,  aish<a;,  (for  exceptions  cf.  isu,  usrtt^sh<^n^, 
V^umisa,  Nisay^):  also  after  kh,  and  sometimes  after 
r;  thus,  khshapa,  ad^rshn^ush,  (^but  tarsatiy,  Pars^, 
etc.). 

Note.     In  the  root  had  (originally  sad)  the  influence  of  a-preceding 
i  is  felt,  even  with  the  augment;  thus,  niyashadayam. 

11.  The  final  S,  after  being  changed  into  h,  is  lost; 
thus,  Pars<2(h)  m«rtiya(h). 

12.  The  dental  before  t  is  changed  into  S  (as  in 
Avestan);  thus,  hasta,  bound,  for  b^dt^. 

The  semivowel  r  sometimes  causes  a  preceding  con- 
sonant to  become  aspirated;  thus,  c<3:khriya  (from  k^r), 
Mithr^,  ufr^^st^m. 

14.  Final  h  has  gone  over  into  the  palatal  j  in  the 
root  duruj  (Skt.  druh),  the  influence  of  the  aspiration 
being  felt  only  in  the  form  durukht^m.  This  exhibits 
the  treatment  of  the  palatal,  namely,  that  it  reverts 
to  its  original  guttural  if  followed  by  any  other  sound 
than  a  vowel. 

Note.     Final  h  of  ihah  becomes  s  befcre  t;  thus,  thastanaiy. 

15.  Medial  h  has  a  tendency  to  fall  away;  thus, 
thatiy,  for  th^h^tiy;  mahya  for  mahahya,  (but  Aur^- 
m^zdah^). 


PART  II. 

ETYMOLOGY. 

NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES. 

CASE  ENDINGS. 

i6.  Endings:  Singular,  a.  The  usual  masculine 
and  feminine  ending  in  the  nominative  is  S.  Stems  in 
a  and  a  have  allowed  the  S  to  pass  over  into  h  (cf. 
II )  which  has  dropped  away,  thus  leaving  the  bare 
stem.  Stems  in  i  and  U  retain  the  S  in  the  form  sh 
(cf.  lo).  By  consonant  forms  it  is  euphonically  lost. 
Neuters(except  ^-stems,  which  add  m)  show  the  sim- 
ple stem  in  this  case.  The  pronominal  ending  for 
this  gender  is  historically  t,  which  is  dropped  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  but  changed  to  sh  before  the  enclitic 
ciy.  The  common  ending  of  the  personal  pronouns 
is  ^m  (which  is  found  also  in  the  plural). 

B.  The  accusative  ends  in  m  or  am.  in  masculine 
and  feminine  nouns.  The  neuter  has  the  same  end- 
ing as  the  nominative. 

C.  The  instrumental  ending  is  a.  In  the  pronom- 
inal declensions  the  nasal  (n)  is  inserted  between  the 
stem  and  ending. 

D.  The  ablative  of  ^-stems  doubtless  ended  in  the 
historical  t  or  d,  which  being  final  has  been  dropped 
euphonically  (cf.  9).  Elsewhere  the  ablative  has  the 
same  ending  as  the  genitive. 

E.  The  genitive  of  ^-stems  adds  hya  (for  original 
•sy^).  The  ending  of  consonant  stems  is  a  for  ^h 
(original  ^s).  Masculine  stems  in  i  and  u  have  regu- 
larly the  historic  ending  ^s,  the  a  of  which  combines 


15 

with  the  vowel  of  the  stem  into  al  (ai)  and  au,  the  S 
being  preserved  in  the  form  sh  (cf.  lo).  Feminine 
stems  take  the  fuller  ending,  a  for  ah  (original  as)  sep- 
arated by  an  interspersed  y. 

F.  The  locative  ending  is  i  in  consonant  and  a- 
stems,  Avhich  appear  euphonically  in  the  form  iy,  aiy 
(cf.  5).  In  masculine  u-stems  this  case  ends  in  au 
(euphonically  ^uv  for  an  original  avi).  If  this  case  oc- 
curred in  a  masculine  i-stem,  the  form  would  be  anal- 
ogous, i.  e.,  <3:in(euphonically  <3:iy  for  an  original  ^yi). 
An  artificial  ending  of  feminine  stems  is  the  addition 
of  a  to  the  masculine  ending;  thus,  ^uva,  a'lya.  The 
true  locative  ending  of  this  gender  appears  probably 
in  one  or  two  words  in  the  form  a,  (duvaraya,,  d^st<2:ya? 
perhaps  loc.  dual,  Arbiraya). 

G.  The  vocative  ends  in  the  simple  stem. 

Dual:  a.  The  ending  of  the  nominative,  accus- 
ative, and  vocative  is  a  as  in  the  Veda. 

B.  A  doubtful  form  of  the  locative  occurs  as  a, 
(dastaya.. ) 

Plural:  a.  In  the  nominative  the  masculine  and 
feminine  ending  aha  appears,  (corresponding  to  the 
Vedic  asas).  The  shorter  ending  a,  ah.  (original  as) 
is  also  in  use.  Pronominal  ^-stems  have  the  mascu- 
line nominative  in  ai.  The  neuter  stems  in  a  end 
in  a. 

B.  The  accusative  ending  is  a  for  ah  (original 
[^]ns)  in  consonant-stems.  In  ^-stems  the  case  appears 
in  the  form  a.  Neuter  stems  have  this  case  like  the 
nominative. 


i6 

C.  The  instrumental  has  everywhere  the  form  bish, 
uniting  with  ^-sterns  into  <3:ibish. 

D.  In  the  genitive  the  ending  is  am.  In  stems 
ending  in  a  vowel,  the  nasal  n  is  inserted,  before  which 
a  short  vowel  is  lengthened.  In  pronominal  declen- 
sions s  is  the  inserted  consonant,  before  which  a  be- 
comes di. 

E.  The  locative  ending  is  suva.  When  preceded 
by  a  or  a,  the  S  passes  over  into  h  and  is  dropped,  the 
form  becoming  uva.  When  preceded  by  other  vowels 
the  S  is  preserved,  and  the  ending  appears  as  shuva 
(cf.  lo). 


17. 

The  normal 

scheme 

of  endi 

ings 

is  as  follows: 

SINGULAR. 

DUAL. 

PLURAL, 

N. 

s(m) 

a.? 

a\ia,  a  (a) 

A. 

avi\.  m 

a.? 

^(a) 

I. 

a 

bish 

Ab. 

a 

— 

— 

G. 

a,  (a)s, 

hya 

a.? 

am 

L. 

i(a) 

a? 

Suva,   uva 

For  convenience  in  comparison  the  case  endings  in 
Sanskrit  are  added. 


(a) 


SINGULAR. 

DUAL. 

PLURAL. 

N. 

s(m) 

a(au) 

^S^S,    «S, 

A. 

^m,  m. 

a(au) 

^s,  n,  (a) 

I. 

a 

bhyam 

bhis,  ais 

D. 

e 

bhyam 

bhy^s 

Ab. 

as,  (^d) 

bhyam 

bhy^s 

G. 

^s  (as)  s, 

sy^. 

OS 

am 

L. 

i  (am)au 

OS 

su 

17 


DECLENSION  I. 

1 8.      Stems  (masculine  and  neuter)  in  a. 
pies  :  haga,  m. ,  god  ;  \\amaxana,  n. ,  battle. 


Exam- 


SINGULAR. 


N.  haga 

A.  hagam 

I.  b^^ga 

Ab.  hagsi 

G.  b^g^hya 

L.  b^grtiy 

V.  hags. 


SINGULAR. 

N.      hamaranam 
A.     hamaranam 


N.A.  b^ga?  (g^usha) 
L.        b«g<^ya?  (d<3:st^ya) 


PLURAL. 

PLURAL. 

N. 

b<?:gah^,  b^ga 

N. 

hamaran3. 

A. 

b^ga 

A. 

hamarana, 

I. 

b^g^ibish 

G. 

b^ganam 

L. 

b<2:g^ishuva 

Examples  of  peculiar  forms  are  : 

A.  The  gen.  sing,  in  hy^  for  hya  (G^rm^p^d^hy^). 

B.  The  abl.  sing,  in  a  for  a  (darshama). 

C.  The  loc.  sing,  in  y  for  iy  (dur^y). 

D.  The  accusative  of  d^r^y^  is  identical  with  the 

stem  in  SZb. 


DECLENSION   II. 

19.      Stems  (masculine)   in  a. 
m<2zda  m.,  Auramazda. 


Example :     Aur*^- 


N.      Aur^m<2:zda 

A.      Aur^zm^zdam 

G.      Aur^ih<2zdaha,  or  Aur<3:m^zdah^ 


i8 


DECLENSION    III. 


20.      Stems   (masculine)   in   i  and   u.      Example   of 
i-stem  :      C^zishpi,  m.,  Caishpis. 


SINGULAR. 


N.  C<^ishpish 

A.         Crtishpim 
Ab.G.  C^ishp^^ish,  or  C^ishpaish 

Example  of  u-stem  :     gathu,  m.,  place. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.         gathush  G.     gathunam 

A.         gathum 
1.  gathva 

Ab.G.  gath^ush 
L.         gath^uv 

Note  :     The  genitive  singular  of  Darayavan  is  Darayavahaush. 


DECLENSION  IV. 

21.      Stems  (feminine)  in  a,  i,  and  u.      Example  of 
a-stem:     t<^uma,  f. ,  family. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  tauma,  G.    t^umanam 

A.  taumam  L.    t^umaiiva 

Ab.  G.  t^umaya 
L.  t<3:umaya  or  t^um<3;ya 

Example  of  i-stem:     Bumi,  f.,  earth. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  bumish 

A.  bumim 

Ab.    G.  bumiya 

Note  :     The  ending  sh  of  the  nominative  singular  is  dropped 
before  the  enclitic  shim  in  hiapism  (Bh.  I,  19). 


19 

Example  of  u-stem:     d^hyu,  f. ,  country  (perhaps 
irregular). 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

N.  d^hyaush  N.  dahyava 

A.  d<7hyaum  or  d^hyum  A.  d^hyav^ 

G.  d^hyunam 

L.  d^hy^^uva  L.  d^hyushuva 


DECLENSION   V. 
22.      Stems  in  ar.      Example:    fr^^mat^^r  m.,  leader. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  fr<?mata 

A.  fr<^matarrt:m  or  fr<i;mat<7r^m 

G.  fr<^matr<rz  (pitr^?) 


DECLENSION   VI. 
23.      Stems  ending  in  a  consonant. 

A.  Examples:   n^z-patjm.,  grandson;  vith,m.,  clan. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  n^7pa 

A.  nrtpat^zm(?) 

I.  n^7pata(.?) 

L.  n<^pati(.?) 

PLURAL. 

A.  vith<^m 

I.  vitha  I.    vithibish  or  vith^bish 

L.  vithi 

B.  Stems  in  an  (m^n,  van).  Examples:  Vi(n)- 
dairan,  m.,  Vindafra  ;  nam<3:n,  n.,  name;  asman,  m., 
heaven;  khsh<2tr^pav^n,   m.,  satrap. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  Vi(n)d«fra 

A.  Vi(n)d«fran^m 


20 


SINGULAR. 

N. 

nsLvna 

A. 

nam^ 

A. 

asman^m 

N. 

khsh^tmpava 

c. 

Stems  in  ^s,  ish. 

Examples:  raucas, 

n.,  day; 

h^dish, 

n.,  site. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

N. 

rauca 

I.    r^uc^bish 

A. 

rauca 

N.  h^dish 

A.  h^dish 


HETEROCLITES. 
24.  Nouns  of  other  declensions  have  a  tendency 
to  assume  forms  of  declension  I.  Thus,  Khsh^yar- 
sh^hyafor  Khsh^yarshaha  ;  Dar<3:y^v^(h)ush^hya  for 
Dar<2:y«v^h^ush  ;  bum<2m  for  bumim  ;  also  n^m^:  some- 
times takes  the  form  of  a  feminine  noun  in  a ;  thus, 
n^ma  for  nama. 


COMPARISON    OF   ADJECTIVES. 
25.     The  comparative  and  superlative  endings  are 
t^r^  and  tama ;  also  iy^s  and  isht^  make  correspond- 
ing forms  of  comparison. 


PRONOUNS. 

26.     The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons 
are  thus  declined  :     ad^m,  I  ;  tuv^m,  thou. 
N.  adam  N.   v<3;y^m 

A.  mam  (enc.  mam)  G.   amakh^m 

Ab.       (enc.  m^) 
G.         mflina  (enc.  m^iy) 


21 


N.         tuv^m 

A.  thuvam 

G.  (enc.  taiy,  tay,  Bh.  IV,  II.) 

27.      The  demonstrative  pronoun  3.va  is  declined  as 
follows : 


SING. 

A 
G 


a.va  (with  enc.  ciy,  av^shciy) 
av^hya 


avrtm         — 
avahya.      — 

PLUR.  M.  F.  N. 

N.      avaiy         ava        — 

A.      av<^iy 

G.      av<3:isham  —         — 

28.  The  declension  of  the  other  demonstrative 
hauv  (Skt.  asau),  that,  he  ;  ait^  (Skt.  etat),  this ;  and 
[yarn  (Skt.,  ay^m),  this,  is  as  follows: 

SING.       M. 

N.      hauv 


N.      im^iy     ima     ima 
A.      imaiy     ima     ima 


N.  iy^m  iy^m     im<2: 

A.  im^m  imam 

I.  ana 

G.  —  ahyaya,  or  ahiyaya 

SING.        M. 

N.      ait^ 
A.      ait^ 

29.      Enclitic  forms  of    the  pronoun  of    the  third 
person  are : 


SINGULAR. 


A.      shim 
G.      sh^iy 


A.      shish 
G.     sham 


A.      dim  A.      dish 

30.      The  declension  of  the  relative  (hy^  [Skt.  sy^] 
ty^m,  etc.)  is  as  follows:  ■ 


22 


N.      hya     hya       tya        N.      ty^-iy  —  tya 

A.      tyam  —  A.      ty^-iy  —  — 

I.       ty^na  —         —  G.      ty^iisham  tyrt:isham  — 

31.  The  interrogative  pronoun  occurs  only  in  the 
vocative  (masculine  singular)  ka. 

The  indefinite  pronoun  is  formed  by  adding  the 
neuter  of  the  pronominal  stem  ci ;  thus,  k^sciy,  cishciy. 

32.  The  adjective  aniy^,  other,  forms  its  neuter 
according  to  the  pronominal  declension  ;  thus,  ani- 
y<2shciy ;  its  ablative  is  aniy^xna,  after  the  analogy  of 
the  instrumental.  Hama,  all,  has  the  genitive  fem- 
inine singular  h^m^hyaya. 


VERBS. 


33.      The  scheme  of  the  normal  endings  of  the  verb 
is  as  follows : 


PRIMA  R  Y  ENDINGS. 


I. 

2. 
3. 

ACTIVE. 
SING.                  PLUR.                                                    SING. 

mi          m^hy                               a\ 
hy         -                                  - 
ti           ^(n)ti                               t^i 

SECONDARY  ENDINGS. 

I. 
2. 
3- 

am 

(h) 
(t),s 

ma                                  i 
a(v\),  sh^(n)                  ta 

I. 
2. 

3. 

I M PER  A  T,  VE  ENDINGS. 

(^)di 
tu 

ta                                   uva 
—                                  tarn 

<2:(n)ta 


Note.     The  ending  of  the  second  person  hy  appears  in  the  form 
h<^/  before  the  enclitic  dish. 


23 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
34.  The  mood-sign  of  the  subjunctive  is  a,  which 
is  added  to  the  tense-stem.  If  the  tense-stem  end  in 
a,  the  combination  results  in  a.  The  inscriptions 
show  the  primary  ending's  ;  thus,  ah<3:tity  f rom  ah,  \>a- 
vatiy  from  bu  (tense-stem  havd). 


OPTATIVE  MOOD. 
35.  The  inscriptions  show  ya  as  the  mood-sign  of 
the  optative,  which  takes  the  regular  series  of  sec- 
ondary endings.  Doubtless  the  simple  i  was  taken  by 
the  tense-stems  in  a  and  by  the  middle  voice.  The 
ya  is  connected  with  the  stem  by  the  union-vowel  i. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 
36.      The  imperative  has  no  mood-sign ;  it  adds  its 
endings  directly  to  the  tense-stem. 


AUGMENT. 

37.  The  augment  is  a  prefixed  a.  If  the  tense- 
stem  begin  with  the  vowel  i  (or  u)  the  augment  com- 
bines with  it  into  the  strengthened  diphthong  ai  (or 
au)  instead  of  the  regular  a\,  aw. 

A.  In  a  few  cases  the  augment  appears  as  a  ;  thus, 
patiyaharam.  It  is  possible,  however,  to  regard  this 
a  as  the  combination  of  the  augment  and  the  prefix  a. 


REDUPLICATION. 
38.      Old   Persian  reduplication  shows   the   prefix- 
ion  to  a  verb-root  of  its  initial  consonant  and  vowel. 

A.  A  long  vowel  is  made  short  in  the  reduplica- 
ting syllable ;  thus,  ad<^da  from  da. 

B.  A  palatal  is  substituted  for  a  guttural  as  the 
consonant  of  the  reduplicating  syllable ;  thus,  c^khriya 
from  kar. 


24 


THE  CONJUGATION-CLASSES. 

39.  The  present  system  (composed  of  the  indic- 
ative, subjunctive,  optative  and  imperative)  is  divided 
into  the  following  classes  : 

I.       ROOT-CLASS. 

In  this  class  there  is  no  class-sign  ;  the  personal 
endings  are  added  directly  to  the  root,  unless  there 
be  a  mood-sign,  as  in  the  subjunctive  and  optative. 

II.       REDUPLICATING-CLASS. 

In  this  class  the  present-stem  is  formed  by  prefix- 
ing a  reduplication  to  the  root. 

III.  THE    NU-CLASS. 

This  class  forms'  its  present-stem  by  adding  the 
syllable  nu,  which  is  strengthened  to  nau  in  the  sing- 
ular. 

IV.  THE   NA-CLASS. 

The  syllable  na  (in  the  plural  ni)  is  added  to  the 
root  to  form  the  present-stem. 

V.  THE  ^-CLASS. 

The  present-stem  is  formed  by  adding  a  to  the 
root,  which  (i)  is  strengthened  or  (2)  remains  un- 
changed. 

VI.  THE     Y^- CLASS. 

The  class-sign  is  ya,  which  is  added  to  the  simple 
root. 

VII.  THE  ^Y^- CLASS. 

This  class  adds  aya  to  the  strengthened  root. 


25 


I.       ROOT-CLASS. 
40.   Example  :     jan,  smite. 


PRESENT   INDICATIVE. 


ACTIVE. 


1.  ]a(n)miy 

2.  j<a:(n)hy 

3.  j^(n)tiy 


1.  — 

2.  ]anahy 

3.  ]anatiy 


1.  j^niyam 

2.  j^niya 

3.  j^niya 


2.  ]a(n)diy 

3.  j«(n)tuv 


MIDDLE. 
PLUR.  SING.  PLUR. 

]a(n)mahy         janaiy         — 

j^n^(n)tiy  ]a{n)ta[y     — 

PRESENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

?  ]anataiy      — 

PRESENT    OPTATIVE. 

j^niyama  .?  — 

?  j^niyata       ? 

PRESENT    IMPERATIVE. 


j^(n)ta 


]<7nuva        — 
j^(n)tam     — 


IMPERFECT. 

aj^(n)ma  2i]aniy 


1.  aj^n^m 

2.  aj^  —  —  — 

3.  Si]a  3.]ana(n)  aj^(n)ta     aj^n^(n)ta 

The  form  aitiy,  (SZb)  from  root  I  shows  that  the 
root  is  strengthened,  if  it  is  able,  in  the  three  persons 
of  the  singular  active. 

As  an  example  of  a  root  beginning  with  I,  illustra- 
ting the  heavy  augment,  the  form  nijay^im  (for  nijai^m) 
from  root  I,   *go,'  can  be  quoted. 

The  verb  ah,  be,  preserves  the  original  s  before  t. 
Its  forms  are  as  follows : 


26 


PRESENT   INDICATIVE. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

1.  amiy  amahy 

2.  ahy  — 

3-     astiy  h^(n)tiy 

PRESENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

3.  ahatiy 

IMPERFECT   ACTIVE. 

1.  aham  — 

2.  —  — 

3-      3ha  ah^(n) 

IMPERFECT  MIDDLE. 

3.  ah<a;(n)ta  and  aha(n)ta 


II.       REDUPLICATING-CLASS. 
41.      Example  :     da,  put. 

Present  Imperative,  3.  s.,  d^datuv. 
Imperfect,  3.  s.,  ad^da. 

Note.     The  root  sta,  stand,  takes  the  vowel  I  as  reduplication,  and 
shortens  the  stem-vowel :  aisht^ta. 


III.       NU-CLASS. 

42.      Examples:  j^d,  ask;  d^rsh,  dare, 
Present  Imperative,  2.  s.,  j^dn^utuv. 
Imperfect,  3.  s.,  ad^rshn^ush. 

The  verb  k^r,  do,  shortens  the  root  to  ku  in   the 
present  and  imperfect.      Its  forms  are  as  follows : 


27 

PRESENT  subjunctive:  SING.  PLUR. 

2.      kun^vahy 
imperfect: 

I.   akun^v^m  akuma  (for  akunuma) 

3.   akun^ush  (in  [S],akun<^sh)    akun^v^(n) 

MIDDLE  imperfect: 

3.   skunavata.  (in  Bh.  I,   12,  akuta). 

Note.  The  union-vowel  a  sometimes  follows  nu,  which  is  strength- 
ened to  nav;  thus,  vainavatiy,  kunavahy,  for  varnava-a-ti,  etc. 

IV.       NA-CLASS. 

43.  All  forms  of  this  class  are  regular  (except 
Imperf.  I.  s.,  adin^m,  from  di,  for  adinam)  ;  thus, 

SINGULAR. 

1.  adinam 

2.  adina,   etc. 

V.       ^-CLASS. 

44.  Examples :  gub,  call ;  bu,  be ;  b^r,  bear ; 
jiv,  live. 

Note.  In  the  following  classes,  the  stem-final  a  is  lengthened  to 
a  before  m  of  the  1st  personal  endings,  but  is  lost  before  ^m  of  the 
1st  sing,  imperf.  and  the  3d  pi.  endings,  and  the  short  a  of  the  ending 
remains  (or  vice  versa).  The  imperative  takes  no  ending  (unless  it 
be  a,  which  unites  with  the  class-sign  into  a). 

(I.)  Examples  of  the  strengthened  root  (cor- 
responding to  the  unaccented  <a;-class  of  the  Sanskrit) 
are  gub  and  bu.  Roots  in  u  (and  i)  strengthen  their 
vowel  to  au  (and  ai)  which  before  the  case-sign  ap- 
pears as  av  (and  ay). 

PRESENT  MIDDLE  :       SING.  PLURAL. 

3,      gauhataiy 

PRESENT  ACT.   SUBJ. 

2.  b<3:vahy 

3.  b^vatiy 

IMPERFECT. 

1 .  3.hayam 

2.  ahava 

3.  ahava  ab^v^z(n). 


28 

(2.)  Examples  of  the  unchanged  root  (correspond- 
ing to  the  accented  ^-class  of  the  Sanskrit)  are  bar 
and  jiv. 

PRESENT  ACTIVE.        SING.  PLURAL. 

2.  harahy 

3.  haratiy  hara(n)tiy 

PRESENT  ACT.   SUBJ. 

2.  b^rahy 

3.  harsLtiy 

IMPERATIVE. 

2.  jiva 

3.  jiv^tuv 

IMPERFECT  ACTIVE. 

3.      3.hara  ab<3;r^(n) 

IMPERFECT  MIDDLE. 

3.      aharata.  ab^r^(n)ta 

VI.      Y^-CLASS. 

Note  i.  The  passive  formation  is  the  middle-endings  added  to 
the  class-sign. 

Note  2.  The  class  sign  is  often  connected  with  the  root  by  an 
interposed  i. 

Examples  :     duruj,  deceive  ;  m^r,  die  ;    th^h,    say. 

A.   Examples    of    the    simple    class    in    active    are 
duruj,  mar. 
present  active,         sing. 

1.  durujiyamiy 

pres.  act.  subj., 

2.  durujiyahy 

imperfect  active, 

3.  adurujiya 

imperfect  middle, 

3.      amariy^ta 


29 

B.   Example  of  the  passive  formation  is  th^h,  which 
verb  adds  the  active  ending  in  the  first  person  plural. 

PRESENT,  PLURAL. 

I.      th^hyam^^hy 

Note  3.  The  passive  formation  of  k^r,  do,  is  upon  the  strength- 
ened stem;  e.  g.,  Imperf.  3.  s.,  akun^vyata. 

Note  4.  It  is  possible  to  regard  the  form  ath^hy^?  as  the  imper- 
fect 3d  sing.,  with  the  active  ending,  instead  of  the  middle,  yet  pos- 
sessed of  a  passive  sense.  I  prefer  to  read,  however,  athahy, 
believing  it  to  be  the  passive  aorist  with  short  vowel  in  the  stem. 
(Cf.  50  N.) 

VII.       A  FA-CLASS. 
46. 

Note  i.     A  causative  conjugation  is  made  from  this  class,  but  all 
verbs  belonging  to  this  class  have  not  a  causative  value. 
Note  2.     The  class-sign  is  added  to  the  strengthened  root. 

Examples :     d^r,  hold  ;   ish,  send  ;   sta,  stand. 

A.  Examples  of  the  simple  class  are  d^r,  and  ish. 

Present,   i.  s. ,  dar<3:yamiy 
Imperfect,  3.  s.,  adsLvaya 

IMPERFECT,  SING. 

1.  aish^y^m 

2.  a.ishaya 

B.  Example  of  the  causative  conjugation  is  sta. 

IMPERFECT,  SING. 

I.      astay^m 

3.  astay<^ 

Note  3.  Sometimes  the  class-sign  appears  as  aya;  thus,  agarbay- 
am,  ag^rbaya,  etc. 

Verbs  sometimes  make  their  formation  in  more 
than  one  class;  thus,  j^diyamiy  and  ]adna\ituv. 


THE   PERFECT. 
47.      The  Old  Persian  has  left   us  only  one   exam- 
ple of  the  perfect;  i.  e.,  Optative,  3  s.,  c^khriya  from 
kar. 


30 

THE   AORIST. 

48.  There  have  been  preserved  two  aorists;  (i) 
the  root  aorist,  which  adds  the  personal  endings  di- 
rectly to  the  root,  and  (2)  the  sibilant  aorist,  which 
takes  sa  as  a  tense-sign.  An  example  of  the  root 
aorist  is  the  form  ada,  3d  person  singular  of  da.  Ex- 
amples of  the  sibilant  aorist  are  aish^a;,  3d  person 
sing.,  and  aish^(n),   3d  person  plur.  of  root  I. 

49.  The  aorist  adds  the  secondary  endings  to  the 
tense-stem,  to  which  the  augment  has  been   prefixed. 

50.  The    root-aorist    has  a  peculiar    formation, 

which  is  passive  in  meaning,    corresponding  to  what 

the  Hindu  grammarians   call   the    "passive   aorist"  of 

the  Sanskrit.      The  third  person  singular  of  the  middle 

is   the  only  form   in   use.      This  person   is   made   by 

adding  i  (which  it  has  borrowed  from  the  first  person) 

to  the  root.      Euphonically,  the  form  appears  as  iy  or 

y.      The   root   is   usually  strengthened;    thus,    adariy 

or  adary  from  dar. 

Note.  In  the  root  thah,  the  stem-vowel  remains  short;  thus, 
ath^hy  (for  athahy).  The  Hindu  grammarians  mention  certain  roots 
of  the  Sanskrit  in  avs\,  which  preserve  the  short  a ;  thus,  agami, 
avnrdhi,  etc. 

51.  The  optative  of  the  root-aorist  doubtless  ap- 
pears in  ag^miya  from  g^m. 

Note.     The  root  bu  loses  its  stem-vowel  in  this  mode;  e.  g.,  biya. 


FUTURE. 
52.      The  Old   Persian  has  left   no  future-system. 
A  periphrastic  future  is  built  out  of  a  nomen  agentis 
and  the  auxiliary  bu;    thus,   j^ta  biya  (Bh.  IV,    17), 
let  him  be  a  killer;  i.  e.,  let  him  kill  (he  shall  kill). 


PASSIVE   PARTICIPLE. 
53.     The  passive  participle  is  formed  by  adding  ta 
to  the  simple  root;  thus,  k^rt^  from  k^r. 


31 


INFINITIVE. 


54.  The  Old  Persian  infinitive  is  formed  by  the 
suffix  tana  (Lat.  tinus  in  crastinus,  diutinus)  which 
appears  always  in  the  locative  case;  thus,  ka(n)ta- 
naiy  from  kan. 

Note.     The  infinitive  of  k^r  change  the  initial  guttural  of  the 
root  to  a  palatal:  e.  g.,  cortanaiy. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

55.      With  accusative:    abiy,    ant^r,  athiy,   up^riy, 
upa,  prttiy,  p^tish,  prt:riy. 

With  instrumental:     p^tiy,  h^da. 
With  genitive:     abish,  p^tiy,  p^sa. 
With  ablative:     haca.. 
With  locative;     anuv,  p^tiy. 


VERBAL    PREFIXES. 
56.      atiy — across,  beyond    ud,  us — up,  out. 
ap^ — away,  forth.  upa — to,  towards. 

a.va — down,  off.  ni — down,  into. 

a — to,  unto.  nij — out,  forth. 

p^ra — away,  forth. 

fr<3: — forward,  forth. 

h^m — together. 


PRIMARY    SUFFIXES. 

57.  a,  2Lj  ah,  i,  ish,  u,  t<3;r  (forming  nouns  of  agency 
and  relationship),  ti,  tu,  tha,  thi,  thu,  tr^,  da,  na, 
m^n,  ma,  ya,  yu,  ra. 


32 

SECONDARY    SUFFIXES. 

58.  iya,  pertaining  to  (used  also  to  form  the  pa- 
tronymic). 

a.ina,  consisting  of. 

ka  (an  adjectival  suffix). 

ta  (having  an  ablative  value  and  often  used  for 
that  case). 

ta  (adverbial  suffix). 

tha  (having  a  local  sense). 

da  (adverbial  suffix). 

na  (adjectival  suffix). 

ra  (adjectival  suffix). 

v^n,  'possessed  of. ' 


33 


PART   III. 

SYNTAX. 

59.  Although  the  Old  Persian  language  can  be 
called  syntactical,  yet  there  exist  many  traces  of  that 
loose  and  free  construction  (paratax)  which  is  original 
to  speech. 

USES   OF   THE    NUMBERS. 

60.  One  or  two  peculiar  constructions  call  for 
notice. 

A.  A  collective  noun  in  the  singular  often  has  the 
government  of  a  plural  noun,  both  over  a  verb  and   a 

pronoun;    thus,    imam   bumim ty^^sham     ad^m 

Sithaham    a.va    akun^v^ta    (NRa)    'This    earth 

what  I   commanded  them    (i.  e.,  this  earth)   this  was 
done.' 

B.  The  singular  of  the  personal  pronoun  a.dam  can 
be  expanded  in  a  following  clause  into  the  plural;  thus, 
p<7tish  mam  h^m^r<^n^m  c^rt^^n^iy  p^sav^  hamaranam 
akuma.  (Bh.  I,  19)  'to  engage  in  battle  against  me, 
afterwards  we  engaged  in  battle.' 

C.  The  plural  can  be  used  for  the  dual;  thus, 
av<^thasham  h^^m^r^in^m  kartam.  (Bh.  II,  6)  'thus  the 
battle  was  fought  by  them.'  (i.  e.,  the  army  of  Vi- 
darna  and  the  rebellious  army);  Anam^k^hy^  mahya 
II  r<3:uc^2:bish  (Bh.  I,  19)  'on  the  2d  day  of  the  month 
Anamaka'  (lit.,  with  two  days). 

USES    OF    THE   CASES. 

THE  .NOMINATIVE. 

61.  The  nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject  of 
a  finite  verb,  and  of  all  words  qualifying  the  subject, 
both  attributively,  predicatively,  and  appositionally. 
A  few  peculiar  uses  .ire^to  be  noticed. 


34 

A.  The  nominative  is  used  often  in  the  weak  syntax 
common  to  the  Old  Iranian  languages.  Artificially  it 
can  be  explained  as  the  subject  of  astiy  supplied,  the 
idea  being  repeated  in  the  form  of  a  pronoun;  thus, 
m<^rtiy^  Frada  na.ma  a,vam  m^thisht^m  akun^v^(n)ta 
(Bh.  Ill,  3)  'a  man,  Frada  by  name,  him  they  made 
chief.' 

Note  i.  The  pronoun  is  sometimes  omitted,  leaving  the  nomina- 
tive where  the  accusative  of  the  direct  object  would  be  expected; 
adrt'm  fraishrzyrt-m  Dad(7rsis  nam<7  Parsrt^  mana.  ha(n)daka  (Bh.  Ill,  2)  'I 
sent  forth  my  subject,  Dadarsis  by  name,  a  Persian.' 

Note  2.  This  free  use  of  the  nominative  is  shown  in  such  expres- 
sions as  Kug^m<7krt  nam^:  vadanam  (Bh.  II,  3)  'there  is  a  town,  Ku- 
ganaka  by  name;  (lit.  there  is  a  town,  [its]  name  is  Kuganaka).  That 
na.ma  is  nominative,  not  accusative,  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  it  some- 
times agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun,  if  that  be  feminine,  e.  g.,  Sik- 
aty^uvatish  nama  dida  Nishaya  namad^/hyaush  (Bh.  I,  13)  'there  is  a 
stronghold,  Sikatyauvatis  by  name;  there  is  a  country,  Nishaya  by 
name. ' 

B.  The  nominative  is  used  in  the  predicate  after  a 
verb  in  the  middle  voice  which  has  the  force  of  a  pas- 
sive; thus,  hya  'Nah\ik(u)dracara  ag^ub^ita  (Bh.  I,  19) 
'who  called  himself  (i.  e.  was  called)  Nabukudracara.* 

THE   VOCATIVE. 

62.  The  vocative  is  the  case  of  direct  address. 
The  following  peculiarity  needs  to  be  considered, 

namely:  The  vocative  of  the  personal  pronoun  tuv^m 
is  made  indefinite  by  the  insertion  of  the  interrogative 
ka  in  the  same  case;  thus,  tuv^m  kahy^  ap^r^m  imam 
dipirrt  v^inahy  (Bh.  IV,  15)  *0  thou  (whoever  thou  art) 
who  wilt  hereafter  see  this  inscription.' 

THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

63.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object 
of  a  verb,  and  of  all  words  which  qualify  the  object, 
both  attributively,  predicately,  and  appositionally; 
e.  g.  Aurrt-m^zda  hy^  imam  bumim  ada  (O.)  *Aura- 
mazda  who  created  this  earth.' 


35 

64-  Some  verbs  which  allow  two  constructions 
may  take  two  accusatives,  one  in  each  construction; 
e.  g. ,  verbs  of  asking",  taking,  etc.;  as  ait«  ad^m 
Aur^m<?zdam  j^diyamiy  (NRa.)  'I  beg  this  of  Aura- 
mazda.'  khsh<i:tr<^mshim  ad^m  adin^m  (Bh.  I,  13).  *I 
took  the  kingdom  from  him.' 

A.  The  verbs  k<^r  and  da  admit  two  accusatives, 
one  as  object,  the  other  as  predicate;  thus,  hya  Dara- 
yava(h.)um.  khshay^thiy<?m  akun<2us.  (O.)  'who  made 
Darius  king;'  h^uv  D a.r ay av a (h.)um  khshay^thiy^m 
adrt:da  (H.),  *he  has  made  Darius  king.' 

B.  A  few  verbs  strengthen  the  verbal  notion  by 
adding  their  past  passive  participle,  which  becomes  an 
accusative  in  agreement  with  the  direct  object;  thus, 
av^m  (h)ub«rt<^m  aharam  (Bh.  I,  8)  'I  supported  him 
well;  (lit,  him  well  supported  I  supported.)' 

65.  The  accusative  can  follow  nouns  which  have 
such  a  verbal  character  that  they  share  the  construc- 
tion of  a  verb;  thus,  Aur^m^^'zda  thuvam  d<2usta  biya 
(Bh.  IV,  16)  'may  Auramazda  be  a  friend  to  you.' 

66.  The  accusative  stands  as  the  limit  of  motion, 
b)oth  with  and  without  a  preposition;  thus,  y^tha  mam 
kam«  (Bh.  IV,  4)  'as  the  wish  (came)  to  me'  (i.  e.  as 
my  wish  was);  a.dam  (karam)  iraishayam  Uvajam, 
(Bh.  I,  17)  *I  sent  an  army  to  Susiana;'  K^(m)bujiy^ 
Mudrayam  ashiy^va  (Bh.  I,  10)  'Cambyses  went  to 
Egypt;'  (karam)  fraish^y^  abiy  Vivan^zm  (Bh.  Ill,  9) 
'he  sent  the  army  to  Vivana.' 

67.  The  accusative  expresses  extent  and  duration, 
both  with  and  without  a  preposition;  thus,  khsh<2p^va 
raucapativa  ava  akun^v^y^ta  (Bh.  I,  7)  'this  was  done 
day  and  night.* 


36 

A.  The  time  in  which  an  action  took  place  seems 
to  have  been  expressed  at  times  by  the  accusative. 
One  case  occurs  in  the  inscriptions;  Garmapadahya 
mahya  I  rauca  th^k^ta  ah^  av^thasham  h^m^r^n^zm 
kartam  (Bh.  Ill,  I.)  *on  the  first  day  of  the  month 
Garmapada  then  it  was  that  thus  the  battle  was  fought 
by  them.'  This  idiom  appears  occasionally  in  San- 
skrit. 

68.  The  accusative  of  specification  defines  the  ap- 
plication of  a  noun;  thus,  h^ca  Pirav^;  nam^  rauta 
(SZb.)  'from  a  river,  the  Nile  by  name.'  Cf.  6i,  A. 
n.  2. 

THE   INSTRUMENTAL. 

69.  The  instrumental  is  the  case  denoting  associa- 
tion and  accompaniment  originally,  and  as  a  derived 
notion,  instrument  and  means. 

70.  The  instrumental  of  accompaniment  usually 
takes  the  preposition  h<2da;  thus,  aish^  hada,  kara  (Bh. 
I,   19)  *he  went  with  his  army.' 

A.  In  enumeration  the  instrumental  may  be  used 
in  the  sense  of  association,  when  the  same  case  as  the 
preceding  nouns  would  be  expected;  thus  abacr/ris 
g^ith^mca  maniy^mca  v(i)thibishca  ....  avastayr/m 
(Bh.  I,  14)  *I  restored  the  commerce  and  the  cattle 
and  the  dwellings  and  together  with  the  clans'  (i.  e. , 
and  the  clans.) 

71.  The  instrumental  of  means  or  instrument  is 
very  frequent;  thus,  v<7shna  Aur^m^zdah^  (Bh.  I,  5.) 
*by  the  grace  of  Auramazda.'  ardrtistan^  . .  .  .vithiya 
karta  (L.)  'the  lofty  structure  was  made  by  the  clan.' 

72.  The  prosecutive  instrumental  denotes  the  as- 
sociation of  time  with  an  event;  thus,  Viy<7khn^?h\a 
mahya  XIV  r^uc^bish  th<3:k^ta    aha  y^diy  udirpat^rta 


37 

(Bh.  I,  ii)  'on  the  14th  day  of  the  month  Viyakhna, 
then  it  was  when  he  rose  up  (lit.  in  connection  with  iz^ 
days).'     Cf.  6j,  A. 

73.  The  instrumental  is  sometimes  used  in  the 
sense  of  the  locative,  denoting  the  point  in  space;  thus, 
ad(a;mshim'gathva  avastay^'m  (Bh.  I,  14)  'I  put  it  in  its 
place.'  m^na  data  ap^riyayrt(n)  (Bh.  I,  8)  'they  fol- 
lowed in  my  law.'  v<^siy  aniy^sciy  n^ib^^m  k^rt^m 
ana  Parsa  (D.)  'there  is  many  another  beautiful  work 
in  this  Persia.' 

THE    DATIVE. 

74.  The  dative  case  has  no  existence  in  Old  Per- 
sian, its  place  being  taken  by  the  genitive. 

THE   ABLATIVE. 

75.  The  use  of  the  ablative  is  to  express  separa- 
tion or  distinction.  The  preposition  h^ca  is  usually 
joined  to  this  case. 

'j^.  The  ablative  denotes  issue,  removal,  release, 
and  like  relations;  thus,  khsh^tr^m  tya  h^ca  amakh^rm 
t^umaya  p<^rabrtrt<7m  ah<7  (Bh.  I,  14)  'the  kingdom 
which  was  taken  from  our  family.'  h^uv  hrtcam<3 
hrtmitriy^  ab^v^  (Bh.  Ill,  5)  'he  became  estranged 
(rebellious)  from  me.' 

A.  The  notion  of  this  ablative  passes  over  to  that 
of  cause;  thus,  kar^shim  h^ca  d^rsh^m^  at^irs^  (Bh.  I, 
13)  'the  state  feared  him  on  account  of  (hisj  violence.' 

j'j.  The  ablative  expresses  defense,  which  is  a  de- 
velopment of  the  idea  of  removal;  thus,  h^ca  dn^uga 
p^tip^y^zuva  (Bh.  IV,  5)  'protect  yourself  from  deceit.' 
imam  d^hyaum  Aur^m<7zda  patuv  h^ca  h<?inaya  h^ca 
d(u)shiyara  h^ca  dr<^uga  (H.)  'may  Auramazda  pro- 
tect this  province  from  an  army,  from  failure  of  crops, 
and  from  deceit.' 


38 

A.  The  ablative  follows  tars,  to  fear.  Such  an 
ablative  contains  this  same  idea  of  removal  (i.  e.,  re- 
coil from  a  dread  object),  h^ca  aniy^na  ma  t^rs^m 
(I)    'let  me  not  fear  a  foe.' 

78.  The  ablative  is  the  case  of  comparison.  This 
use  is  simply  a  special  application  of  its  original  no- 
tion of  distinction;  thus,  a.pataram  haca.  Parsa  (NRa) 
'another  than  a  Persian'  (lit.  another  from  a  Persian.) 

THE   GENITIVE. 

79.  The  true  use  of  the  genitive  is  to  qualify 
a  noun  with  the  same  powers  as  the  adjective  enjoys. 
The  genitive,  however,  did  not  remain  restricted  to 
this  adjectival  construction,  but  is  employed  with 
verbs  and  adjectives. 

80.  The  subjective  genitive,  including  the  author 
and  possessor,  expresses  the  subject  of  the  action; 
thus  v<3:shna  Auramazdaha  ad^m  khshay(3:thiy<3:  amiy 
(Bh.  I,  5)    'by  the  grace  of  Auramazda,  I   am  king.^ 

A.  The  genitive  regularly  follows  kartamy  perhaps 
on  account  of  a  substantive  idea  in  the  participle; 
thus,  av^thasham  hamaranam  k^rt^m  (Bh.  Ill,  10) 
*thus  the  battle  was  fought  by  them.' 

Note.     The  genitive  expressing  means  is  found  in  Sanskrit. 

B.  The  genitive  follows  p^sa;  thus,  kar^  Pars^ 
p^sa  mana.  ashiy^v^  (Bh.  Ill,  6)  'The  Persian  army 
followed  me.' 

C.  The  genitive  expresses  manner;  thus,  hama- 
hyaya  th^rd^  (Bh.  IV,  7)    'in  every  way.' 

81.  The  partitive  genitive  denotes  the  whole  of 
which  a  portion  is  taken;  thus,  ad^m  Dar^y/?v<7(h)ush 
khshayrt:thiy^  khshay^thiyanam  (Bh.  I,  i)  'I  am  Da- 
rius, the  king  of  kings.' 


39 

A.  The  genitive  is  dependent  on  an  adjective 
(especially  a  superlative)  which  has  substantival  char- 
acter enough  to  allow  a  partitive  construction;  thus 
Aurrt:m<2zda  hya  m^thisht^  b^ganam  (F.)  'Auramazda, 
who  is  the  greatest  of  the  gods.' 

82.  The  objective  genitive,  which  designates  the 
noun  as  the  object  of  the  action,  occurs  nowhere  in 
the  inscriptions. 

83.  The  datival  genitive  expresses  the  indirect 
object;  thus,  kar<3;hya  avrt:tha  athaha  (Bh.  I,  16)  'thus 
he  said  to  the  state.'  Auram^zda  khsh<a:tr<3:m  m<^na 
ivdhara  (Bh.  I,  5)  'Auramazda  gave  the  kingdom  to 
me.' 

Note.  This  use  is  simply  a  pregnant  construction  of  the  posses- 
sive genitive;  e.  g.,  khsh(7tr(?m  mrt'na  irabara,  he  gave  the  kingdom  to 
me  (made  it  mine  by  giving).  This  same  power  of  the  genitive  is 
shared  by  the  Prakrit  and  the  late  Sanskrit. 

A.  The  verb  duruj,  ''to  deceive,'  is  followed  by 
the  genitive  once  in  the  inscriptions;  elsewhere  it 
governs  the  accusative.  Kar^hya  av<3:tha  adurujiy^ 
Bh.  I,   1 1   'thus  he  deceived  the  people.' 

B.  The  genitive  enclitic  sham  follows  a.]anam  in 
place  of  the  accusatfve  of  direct  object  in  Bh.  IV,  2 
ad^msham  aj^n<3:m,  T  smote  them,' and  patiyakshaiy 
NRa. 

THE   LOCATIVE. 

84.  The  locative  is  the  case  denoting  location  and 
condition.  The  locative  expresses  situation,  both 
with  and  without  a  preposition;  thus,  ad^m  khsha- 
y^thiy^  Pars^iy  (Bh.  I,  i)  *I  am  king  in  Persia.'  hy^ 
Mad^ishuva  m<3:thisht^  aha  Bh.  II,  6  *who  was  great- 
est among  the  Medes.'  vardanam  anuv  Ufr<2t<a:uva 
(Bh.  1,(19)  'a  town  on  the  Euphrates.' 

A.  The  locative  takes  the  place  of  the  instrumen- 
tal in  the  expression  nip^diy,  'on  foot;'  e.g.,  atiyaish^. 


40 

passiva  Vivan^  hada,  kara  nip^^diy  (Bh.  Ill,  1 1)  *after- 
wards  Vivana  followed  with  his  army  on  foot.' 

B.  The  locative  can  take  the  place  of  the  partitive 
genitive;  thus,  Mad^ishuv^  m^thishta  (Bh.  II,  6)  'the 
greatest  among  the  Medes.' 

THE    PECULIARITIES   OF    THE    INSCRIPTIONS    OF   AR- 
TAXERXES    MNEMON   AND   ARTAXERXES   OCHUS. 

85.  These  inscriptions  exhibit  such  careless  irreg- 
ularities that  they  call  for  special  treatment. 

A.  The  nominative  is  attracted  into  the  case  of  the 
preceding  noun,  although  the  predicate  appears  in  the 
nominative;  thus,thatiy  Art^khshrttraDar<3:y^v^(h)ush- 
ahya.  khshay<2thiy<2:hya  putr<2  Dar ay av a (h.)ushahy a.  Ar- 
takhsh<2thrahya  khshay^thiy<3:hya  putr<3!  (S.)  'says 
Artaxerxes,  the  son  of  Darius,  the  king ;  Darius 
(was)  the  son  of  Artaxerxes,  the  king.' 

B.  The  nominative  appears  for  the  accusative  with 
a  qualifying  pronoun  in  the  accusative;  im^m  ap^dana 
(S.)  '(Darius  made)  this  structure.' 

C.  The  genitive  is  attracted  into  the  case  of  the 
subject  or  the  predicate  nominative  and  appears  in 
the  nominative;  thus,  Art<3:khsh^tra  Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy^  putr^  (P.)  'Artaxerxes,  son  of  Darius, 
the  king.' 

D.  The  nominative  is  thrust  into  the  accusative, 
yet  the  passive  construction  is  retained;  thus,  im^m 
usat^sh^nam  atha(n)g«nam  mam  upa  mam  k^^rta  (P.) 
'this  stone  lofty  structure  was  built  by  me  for  myself.' 

E.  The  accusative  expresses  means,  taking  the 
place  of  the  regular  genitive  construction  after  k^rt^m; 
thus,  ty^  mam  k^rta  (P.)  'what  was  done  by  me.' 

F.  A  substantive  in  the  singular  takes  its  partici- 
ple in  the  plural;  thus,  tya  mam  k<3:rta  (P.)  'what  was 
done  by  me.' 


41 

THE  ADJECTIVE. 

86.      The  adjective  and  the  participle  agree  with  the 
substantive  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 
A  few  peculiar  cases  are  to  be  noticed. 

A.  The  adjective  can  be  hardened  into  a  neuter 
substantive  and  in  this  way  enter  into  the  relation  of 
an  appositive  or  a  predicate  noun;  thus,  ciyk^^r^m  ava 
dahysLva  (NRa.)  'beautiful  are  the  regions  (lit.  a  beauty 
these  regions  are),  h^uv  kamanam  a.ha  (Bh.  II,  6) 
'that  was  faithful  (lit.  a  faithful  thing).' 

B.  The  adjective  is  used,  most  often  in  the  singu- 
lar, to  take  the  place  of  the  name  of  a  country;  thus, 
Pars^,  'Persia  (lit.  Persian).'  Mad^,  Media  (lit.  Me- 
dian).' 

Note  i.  Sometimes  the  plural  occurs,  and  in  a  few  cases  alter- 
nates with  the  singular;  thus,  Yauna  and  Yauna  (NRa)  'Ionia  (Jit. 
Ionian  and  lonians).' 

Note  2.  The  real  name  of  the  country  appears  a  few  times;  thus, 
Uvarazmish  (NRa.),  Harauvatish  (Bh.  I,  6). 

C.  The  noun  vith,  'clan,'  when  used  apposition- 
ally  takes  the  place  of  the  regular  adjective  vithiy^ai; 
thus,  h<2da  v(i)thibish  b<3:g^ibish  (H.)  'with  (his)  fellow 
gods  (lit.  with  the  gods  [namely  his]  fellows).' 

D.  In  the  inscriptions  of  Artaxerxes  Ochus  the 
masculine  of  the  pronoun  agrees  with  the  feminine 
noun;  thus,  im^m  us^t^sh^nam  (P.)  'this  lofty  struc- 
ture.' 


I 


PRONOUNS. 

87.  The   demonstrative  pronouns  av^  and  h^uv 
supply  the  place  of  the  third  personal  pronoun. 

88.  The   relative  pronoun  ty^,  beside  enjoying  its 
ordinary  functions,  has  the  following  important  uses: 

A.     The  relative  pronoun  frequently  serves  to  con- 
nect the  noun  with  whatever  qualifies  it,  either   appo- 


42 

sitionally,  adjectively,  adverbially,  genitively,  or  loca- 
tively.  In  this  capacity  its  independent  character  is  lost 
and  it  agrees  with  its  antecedent,  not  only  in  gender  and 
number  but  also  in  case,  thus  becoming  the  equivalent 
of  the  Greek  article;  thus,  v(i)th<2m  tyam  amakh^m 
(Bh.  I.  14)  'the  clan  of  ours. '  ty^na  m<2na  data  (Bh.  I, 
8)  *in  my  law.'  khsh^tr<^m  ty^  Babir^uv  (Bh.  I,  16) 
'the  kingdom  at  Babylon.'  kar^m  tyam  Mad^m  (Bh. 
II,  6)  'the  Median  army.'  Nabuk(u)dr^c«r«  amiy  hy^ 
Nabunit^hya  putr*^;  (Bh.  II,  16)  'I  am  Nabukudracara 
the  son  of  Nabunita.' 

B.  The  relative  can  be  used  in  the  place  of  a  demon- 
strative; thus,  kar^m  fraish^y^m  ty^ip<a:tiy  (Bh.  II,  13) 
<I  sent  an  army  against  these.' 


USES  OF  THE  VOICES. 

89.  There  are  (as  in  Sanskrit)  two  voices,  active 
and  middle.  The  passive  notion  is  conveyed  through 
the  middle  Voice  by  means  of  a  definite  class-sign. 

One  or   two  peculiar  constructions  call  for  notice. 

A.  The  active  with  direct  object  can  take  the  place 
of  the  middle;  thus,  thuvam  msitya  durujiyahy  (Bh. 
IV,  6)  *do  not  deceive  yourself.' 

B.  The  middle  without  the  passive  sign  sometimes 
contains  the  passive  signification;  thus,  hy^  N^buk(u)- 
dracara  ag^ub^ta  (Bh.  I  19)  'who  was  called  (lit. 
called  himself)  Nabukudracara. 'agrtrbay^ta(Bh.  II,  13) 
«he  was  taken.'  an^yata  (Bh.  I,  17)  'he  was  led.' 

C.  The  passive  participle  of  neuter  verbs  has  no 
passive  notion,  but  simply  an  indefinite  past  tense; 
thus  hrt(n)gmrtta  (Bh.  II,  7)  'having  come  together.' 


43 

USES  OF  THE  MOODS. 

THE    INDICATIVE. 

90.  The  indicative  is  used  in  the  recital  of  facts. 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

91.  The  subjunctive  has  a  general  future  meaning, 
denoting  what  is  possible  and  probable.  This  use  is 
perhaps  the  historic  one  from  which  the  nicer  and 
more  elaborate  values  of  this  mood  in  the  cognate 
languages  have  been  developed;  thus,  tuvam  ka  hya 
aparam  imam  dipim  p^tip^^rsahy  (Bh.  IV,  6)  *0  thou 
who  wilt  hereafter  examine  this  inscription.' 

A.  Conditional  sentences  introduced  by  y^diy,  'if, 
take  their  verbs  in  the  subjunctive;  thus  yadiy  avatha. 
m<3:niyahy  (Bh.  IV,  5)  'if  thus  thou  thinkest.' 

B.  Purpose  clauses  introduced  by  y^tha,  'in  order 
that',  take  their  verbs  in  the  subjunctive;  thus,  yatha. 
khshnasahy  (NRa.)  'in  order  that  you  may  know.' 

C.  The  negative  maty*^;  (ma  and  ty^)  denoting  pur- 
pose or  warning  takes  the  subjunctive;  thus,  maty^ 
mam  khshnasatiy  (Bh.  I,  1 3)  'that  (the  state)  may  not 
know  me.' 

D.  The  subjunctive  with  the  negative  ma.tya  is 
used  to  express  prohibition,  less  peremptory  than  the 
imperative,  more  so  than  the  optative;  thus,  p^tik<a:ra 
Tn^tya  visanahy  (Bh.  IV,  15)  'thou  shalt  not  destroy 
(these)  pictures.' 

E.  The  temporal  conjunction  yava  takes  the  sub- 
junctive in  its  ordinary  future  sense ;  thus,  yava 
t^uma  ah^tiy  (Bh.  IV,  16)  'as  long  as  (thy)  family 
shall  be.' 

THE   OPTATIVE. 

92.  The  optative  denotes  what  is  desired,  in 
which  capacity  it  is  the  equivalent  of  a  mild  impera- 
tive. In  a  weakened  sense  it  denotes  what  may  or 
can  be. 


44 

A.  The  optative  with  the  negative  particle  ma 
expresses  a  desired  negation,  not  direct  prohibition ; 
thus,  utat^iy  t^uma  ma  biya  (Bh.  IV,  li)  'may  there 
not  be  a  family  of  thine.' 

THE   IMPERATIVE. 

93.  The  imperative  expresses  a  command  or  a 
desire;  thus,  paraidiy  av^m  j^diy  (Bh.  II,  7)  *go, 
smite  that  (army).' 

THE   INFINITIVE. 

94.  The  infinitive,  in  its  fundamental  and  usual 
sense,  expresses  purpose,  as  the  dative  infinitive  of  the 
Veda.  It  has  also  become  employed  in  a  freer  sense 
as  the  simple  complement  of  a  verb ;  thus,  ais^  h^^da 
kara  p^tish  mam  hamaranam  cartanaiy  (Bh.  I,  19) 
'he  went  with  (his)  army  against  me  to  engage  in 
battle,'  kasciy  naly  ad^rshn^ush  cisciy  th<^st^n^iy 
p<3:riy  G^^umat^m  (Bh.  I,  13)  'no  one  dared  to  say 
anything  against  Gaumata.* 


USES   OF    THE    TENSES. 
95.     A  few  peculiar  uses  deserve  notice. 

A.  The  present  with  diivita.taranam  denotes  that 
the  action  was  begun  in  the  past  and  continues  in  the 
present.  This  peculiarity  is  to  be  compared  with  the 
Latin  use  of  the  present  with  iam  diu,  etc. 

B.  The  indicative  forms  of  the  imperfect  and 
aorist  appear  without  augment.  With  the  loss  of 
this  augment  the  imperfect  and  aorist  sacrifice  their 
own  peculiar  character  and  take  on  other  notions. 
After  ma  prohibitive  the  sense  is  that  of  a  subjunc- 
tive or  optative ;  thus,  h^ca  aniyana  ma  t^rs^m  (I.) 
*  may  I  not  fear  an  enemy. ' 


45 

C.  Yata  in  the  sense  of  "while"  takes  the  imper- 
fect; in  the  sense  of  ''until"  it  takes  either  the  imper- 
fect or  aorist. 

D.  The  passive  participle,  both  with  and  without 
an  auxiliary  verb,  is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  passive 
perfect;  thus,  amata  am^hy  (Bh.  I,  3)  'we  have  been 
tested  (or  prolonged).'  B^rdiy^  av^j<2:t^  (Bh.  I,  lo) 
'Bardiya  was  slain.' 


DEPENDENT    CLAUSES. 

96.  Final  Clauses.      Cf.  91,  B.  and  C. 

97.  Consecutive  Clauses.  Tya  (the  neuter  of  the 
relative)  introduces  clauses  expressing  result,  and 
takes  the  verb  in  the  indicative ;  thus,  dr<^ug^dish 
h<7mitriya  akun^ush  ty^  im^iy  kar^m  adurujiy^sh<3:(n) 
(Bh.  IV,  4)  'a  lie  made  them  rebellious  so  that  they 
deceived  the  people.' 

98.  Conditional  Clauses.      Cf.  91,  A. 

99.  Causal  Clauses.  Y^tha  expressing  cause 
takes  the   verb   in   the   indicative ;    thus,   Aur/^m<a:zda 

up<i:stam  ahara y<3:tha  n^iy  arik<a;  ah<^m  (Bh.  IV, 

13)    'Auramazda   gave   aid,    because    I    was   not   un- 
friendly.' 

100.  Temporal  Clauses. 

A.  Y^tha,  "while,"  takes  the  indicative;  "in 
order  that,"  the  subjunctive. 

B.  Yata,   Cf.  95,  C. 

C.  Yava,  "as  long  as,"  prefers  the  subjunctive. 
Cf.   91,  E. 

INDIRECT   DISCOURSE. 

101.  A  form  of  indirect  narrative  is  hardly  devel- 
oped   in   the    language.       Statements    are    expressed 


46 

usually  in  the  most  simple  direct  manner;  thus,  yadiy 
av^^tha  m^niyahy  d^hyaushm^iy  duruva  ah<2tiy  (Bh. 
IV,  5)  'if  thus  thou  thinkest,  may  my  country  be  safe.' 

A.  This  influence  of  the  direct  form  of  statement 
is  felt  often  by  the  pronoun  in  a  dependent  clause; 
thus,  kar<3:m  avaj^niya  maty^man  khshnasatiy  (Bh.  I, 
13)  'he  would  smite  the  people  that  they  may  not 
know  him  (lit.  that  they  may  not  know  me)';  the  idea 
being  expressed  as  it  was  conceived  in  the  mind  of  the 
author. 

B.  A  tendency  towards  indirect  discourse  is  mani- 
fested by  the  use  of  the  neuter  of  the  relative  ty^; 
thus,  kar<^hya  n^iy  azda  ab^v^  ty^  B^rdiy^  av^j^t^ 
(Bh.  I,  10)  'there  was  ignorance  on  the  part  of  the 
state  that  Bardiya  was  slain.' 

Note.  The  relative  pronoun  yat  in  Sanskrit  appears  to  have  a  few 
times  this  same  function.  I  refer  to  a  case  I  have  met  recently  in  my 
reading,  namely  in  the  Khandogya  Upanishad. 


COMPOUNDS. 

102.  Copulative.  The  composition  of  two  nouns 
in  coordinate  construction  as  if  connected  by  the  con- 
junction "and"  does  not  appear  in  the  inscriptions. 

103.  Determinative.  The  composition  of  two 
words,  the  former  of  which  qualifies  the  second,  either 
as  a  noun  in  case  relation,  adjective,  or  verb,  occurs; 
thus,  sarastiharaf  'having  bows',  Aur^m^zda,  SLsahara, 
etc. 

104.  Adjective.  The  determinative  compound  by 
assuming  the  idea  of  • 'possessing"  becomes  an  adjec- 
tive; thus,  Art^khshatr^j,   'Artaxerxes*  (as   a  determi- 


47 

native,  'lofty  kingdom';  as  an  adjective  compound, 
^'possessing  a  lofty  kingdom'.)  zurakara,  'possessing 
power  as  action',  (h)uv^sp«,  paruzana,  etc. 

Note.    The  compound  paruzana  has  its  two  members  separated,  yel 
preserves  the  meaning  and  value  of  a  compound;  thus,  paruv  zananan 

(Ca)  (Cb)  (K). 

I02.  Prepositional.  The  composition  of  two 
words,  the  former  of  which  is  a  preposition  governing 
the  second,  is  found  often;  thus,  passLva,  'after  this', 
taradaraya  patipadam  iraharvamf  etc. 


48 


A  complete  classification  of  all  the  verb-forms  oc- 
ring  in  the  Old  Persian  language, 

Aj  (?),  drive.       (See  vocabulary.) 
Impf.  3.  s.,  Sijata. 

Akhsh  (?),  see.      (See  vocabulary.) 
Impf.   I.  s.,  akhsh<2iy. 

Ah.  be. 
Pres.    I.    s.,    amiy;   2.    s.,    ahy,   3.   s.,  astiy;   1.    p.; 
am^hy:  3.  p.,  h^(n)tiy;  3.  s.,  ah^tiy(subj.).      Impf.   i. 
s.,  ah^m;    3.    s.,   ah^;   3.    p.,  ah^(n);   3.    p.    (middle) 
ah^(n)ta,  (ah^[n]t^). 

Av^h,  ask  aid. 
Impf.  (middle)  I.  s.,  avahaiy. 

I>  go- 
Pres.  3.  £.,  aitiy;  2.  s.,  idiy  (impv.);  2.  p. ;  ita  (impv.) 
Impf.  I.  s.,  ay^m,  3  p.,  ay^(n).      Aor.  3.  s.,  aish^;  3. 
p.,aish^(n).Part.,   ita 

Ish,  send. 
Impf.  I.  s,  aiishayam  3.   s.,   aish^zy^. 

K^n,  dig. 
Pres.  3.  s.,  k^(n)tuv  (impv.).      Impf.  I.  s.,  ak^n^m; 
3.  s.,  ak^.     Aor.  (passive)  3.  s.,  ak^niy.      Inf.  k<3:(n)- 
t^n^iy. 

J^ar,  do. 

Pres.  2.  s.,  kun^vahy  (subj.),  k^rahy  (subj.)  2.  s. 
k^ra  (impv.)  Impf.  i.  s.,  akun^^v^m;  3.  s.,  akun^iush, 
(akunash:  S),  i.  p.,  akuma,  3.  p.  akun^v^(n),  3.  s. 
(middle)  akun^v^ta,  3.  p.  akun^va(n)ta,  (akuta),  3.  s. 
(passive)  akun^vy^ta;  Perf.  3.  s.  c^khriya  (opt.).  Inf. 
cartanaiy;  Part  k^rt^. 


OF  run. 

XTNIVERSITT 

Khshi  (?),  rule.      (See  vocabulary.) 
Impf.  (middle)  i.   s,  akhsh^iy. 

Khshnas,   know. 

Pres.   2.   s.   khshnasahy  (subj.),    3.    s.   khshnasatiy 
(subj.) 

Gam,  go. 
Aor.  3.  s.  gm^ta,  3.  s.  jamiya  (opt).  Part  gmata. 

Garb,  seize. 
Impf.  I.  s.  a.garha.yam,  3.   s.,  agarhaya,  3.  p.  ag^r- 
bay<3:(n),  3.  s.  (middle)  ag^bayata, 

Gud,  hide. 
Pres.  2.  s.  g<^ud^yahy  (subj.);  Impf.  3,  s.  agaudaya, 

Gub,  speak. 
Pres.   (middle)     3.    s.    g^ubd:t^iy,    3.    s.    g^ubat<3:iy 
(subj.);  Impf.  3.  s.  ag^ub^ta. 

Jady  ask. 
Pres.  I.  s.  j^^diyamiy,  3.  s.  j<^d<2:n^utuv  (impv.) 

]an,  smite. 
Pres,  2.  s.  jadiy  (impv.),  2.  p.  j^ta  (impv.)   j^niya 
(opt.);  Impf.  I   s.    ajanam,    3.  s.    aj^,  3  p.  a]ana  (n); 
Part.  j<2t^. 

Jiv,  live. 
Pres.  2.  s.  jiv^hy,  2.  s.  jiva  (impv.) 

T^khsh,  fashion. 
Impf.  (middle)  I  s.  at^khsh^iy,  3.  s.  at^khsh^ta,  3. 
p.  at^khsha(n)ta. 

TaVy  cross. 
Impf.  I  s.  at^r^(m?)  (Bh.  V,  4)   3.  s.,  at^r^  (t^rti- 
yana.?),  i.  p.  atarayama;  Part.    t^rt^. 


so 

T^rs,  fear. 
Pres.  3.  s.  tarsatiy;  Impf,  i.  s.  ditarsam,  3.  s.  atarsa. 

Thad,  go.(?) 
Impf.  2.  s.  Sithadaya. 

Th<3:h,  say. 
Pres.  2.  s.  thahy,  3.  s.  thatiy,   I.  p,  (passive)  th^h- 
yam^hy;  Impf.   i,  s.  ath^zh^m,  3.  s.  athaha;  Aor.  (pas- 
sive) 3.  s.  ath<a:hi;   Inf.  thastanaiy. 

Trar,  guard. 
Impf.   I.  s.  atrarayam. 

Dan,  flow. 
Pres.  3.  s.  danauvatiy. 

Dar,  hold. 
Pres.   I.   s.    dar<2yamiy;   Impf.    3.   s.    adaraya;  Aor. 
(passive)  3.  s.  adariy  (adary,  adari). 

D<3:rsh,  dare. 
Pres.  (middle)  I.  s,    d^rsh^iy;  Impf.    3.    s.    ad<2rsh- 
n^ush. 

1.  Da,  know. 
Impf.  3,  s.  adana. 

2.  Da,  put. 

Impf.  3.  s.  ad^da;  Aor.  3.  s.  ada,  ad^da. 

3.   Da,  give. 
Pres.  3.  s.  d^datuv  (impv,) 

I.   Di,  see. 
Pres,  2.  s.  didiy  (impv.) 

2.    Di,  take. 
Impf.  I.  s.  adin^m,  3.  s.  adina;  Part.  dit^. 


51 

Duruj,  deceive. 
Pres.  2.  s.  durujiyahy  (subj. ;)  Impf.  3.  s.  adurujiya, 
3.  p.  adurujiy^sh<7(n);   Part,  durukht^. 

Duv<^r,  make.  (?) 
Part,   duvarta. 

Ni,  lead. 
Impf.   I.  s.  a.nayam,  3.  s.  anayay  3.  s.  (middle)  an^- 
y^ta. 

Fat,   fall. 
Impf.  3.  s.  (middle)  apatata. 

Vars,  examine. 
Pres.    2.    s.    p<^rsahy   (subj.)    3.    s.    p<^rsatiy  (subj.) 
p«rsa  (impv.);  Impf.   i.  s.  ap<2:rs^m;  Part,  fr^^st^. 

Pa,  protect. 
Pres.  2.  s.  padiy  (impv.),  3.  s.  patuv  (impv,,)  2.  s. 
(middle)  p^y^uva  (impv.)   Part.  pat^. 

Pish,  rub. 
Impf.  1.  s.  apish<^m;  Inf.  pishtrt:n<3:iy;  Part,  pisht^. 

B<7(n)d,    bind. 
Part.  b^st^. 

Bar,  bear. 
Pres.  3.  p.  b<3:rrt:(n)tiy,  haratya?,  3.  s.  b^r^tuv  (impv.); 
Impf.   I.  s.  abaram,  3.  s.  ab^ra  3.   p.    ab^ra(n),    3.    p. 
(middle)  ab^r«(n)ta;  Part,  barta. 

Bu,  be. 
Pres.    3.    s.    b^vatiy  (subj.);  Impf.   i.  s.  ahavam,  3. 
s.  ab^va,  3.  p.  abava(n);  Aor.  3.  s.  biya  (Opt.) 

M^n,  think. 
Pres.  3.  s.  maniyatiy  (subj.) 

M^n,  remain. 
Impf,  3.  s.  3imanaya. 


52 

M^r,  die. 
Impf.  (middle)  3.  s.  am^riy^ta. 

Ma,  measure. 
Part.  mat^. 

R^d,  leave.C?) 
Impf.  2.  s.  Sitada. 

KaSy   come. 
Pres,    3.  s.  r<3:satiy  (subj.);  Impf.  i.  s.  ar^s^m,  3.  s. 
ar^s<3:. 

Vain,  see. 
Pres.  2.  s.  v^inahy  (subj.)   3.  s.  (middle)  vainataiy; 
Impf.  3.  s.  divaina. 

Vaj,  lead. 
Impf.  I.  s.  avajam. 

Yar,  cause  to  believe. 
Pres.  3.  s.  v^rn^vatiy  (subj.)  3.  s.    (middle)  warna- 
v^tam  (impv.) 

S^n,  destroy. 
Pres.  2.  s.  s^nahy  (subj.) 

S^r,  kill.(?) 
Impf.  (middle)  3.  s.  as^riy^ta. 

St^r,  sin. 
Impf.  2.  s.  astarava. 

Sta,    stand. 
Impf.  3.  s.  aisht<3:ta,  1.  s.  astay^m,  3.  s.  astay^. 

Shiyu,  go. 
Impf.  I.  s.  ashiy^v^m,  3.  s.  ashiy^v^,  3.  p.  ashiy^j- 
v^(n). 

H^(n)j,  throw. 
Impf.  I.  s.  ah^(n)j^m. 

H^d,  sit. 
Impf.  I.  s.  ahad<2y^m. 


TRANSLITERATION 


OF 


THE   INSCRIPTIONS 


I. 

INSCRIPTION    OF    CYRUS. 

INSCRIPTION  OF  MURGHAB.       (m.) 

*Ad^m  *Kurush  ^khshay^aithiy^?;  ^HakhRmanishiya. 

lAdara.  36.       2Kurush,   IC.       ^khshay/^thiya.   18.       '•H^kham^ni- 
shiyrt,  58. 


II. 


INSCRIPTIONS  OF  DARIUS  HYSTASPES. 

THE   INSCRIPTION    OF   BEHISTAN.       (BH.  ) 

1.  Adam  Dar^y<3:V(3:(h)ush*  khshayathiya  vazraka 
khshay(3:thiy^  khshay^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^  Pars^^iy 
khshay^thiy^  M^hyunam  V(i)shthasp(^hya  putm  Ar- 
sham^hya  'naps.  H^kham^nishiy<3:.  2.  ^Thatiy  Data- 
y^v<3:(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  mam,  '^pita  V(i)shtasp^ 
V(i)shtasp<2hya  pita  Arsham^  Arsham^hya  pita  Ariya- 
ramna  Ariyaramn^^hya  pita  [C^ishpish]  ^C^ishpaisb 
pita  H^kham^nish.  3,  Thatiy  Dar<3:y^v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy^  av^hy^radiy  vayam  H^kham^nishiya 
^th^hyam^hy  haca.  ^p^ruviy<7t<^  ^amata  ^am^hy  haca 
p<^ruviy^t<3^  "hya  amakh^m  "t^uma  khshay<2thiya 
dLha(n).  4:.  Thatiy  Dar^y<2v^(h)ush  khshay<^thiy<3; 
VIII  m<3;na  t^umaya  ty<3!iy  paruvam  khshay^thiya 
ah^(n)  adam  navamalXduvita.tarnam  vayam  khshay^- 
thiya  am^hy,  5.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v<2(h)ush  khshay^- 
thiy<3:  v<2shna  "Auramazdaha  adam  khshay^thiy^j:  amiy 
Aur<3:m^zda  khsh«tr<2m  '^m^^na  irahara.  6.  Thatiy 
Dar<3:y^v<3:(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  ^'*ima  d<^hyav^  tya  mana 
'5prt'tiyaish(3;(n)  v^jshna  Aur<7m^zdah(3;  '"ad^msham 
khshay^thiy^  ah^m  Pars^  (H)uv^j^  Babirush  Athura 

*The  author  not  feeling  ready  to  accept  the  theory  of  Linder 
(Literar.  Centralblatt,  18S0,  p.  358)  respecting  the  derivation  of  the 
second  member  of  the  compound  (cf.  Spiegel:  Die  Altpersischen  Keil- 
inschriften,  2nd  edition)  retained  the  old  spelling  4-vush  in  his  first 
edition.  The  otherwise  anomalous  genitive  +vah<7ush  has  induced 
him  to  transliterate  +v<7(h)ush.     See  vocabulary. 

id^hyunam,  21.  ^^^pa,  23.  "thatiy,  15;  39,  V.  "pita,  22. 
'C<zishpaish,  20.  ®thrthyamr?hy,  45,  b.  ^p^ruviyrttfl,  58.  ^amata, 
95,  D.  •amahy  40  (end)-  i^hya,  30;  87,  a.  ^U^uma,  21.  ^^Aura- 
mflzdaha,  19.  ^'mana,  83.  ^*ima,  28.  i''prttiyaishrt(n),  48.  *«ad«m- 
sham.  29. 


55 

Arahaya  Mudray^  tyaly  darayahya,  Sp^rd<3!  Y^una 
Mad^  Arming  Katapatuka  Tarthava  Zara(n)ka  Harai- 
va  Vvsirazamiya  Bakhtrish  Sugud^  G^(n)dar^  Saka 
Thatagush  H^r<a:uv^tish  Maka  haharvam  dahyava 
XXIII.  7.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^^thiy^ 
ima  dahydiva  tya  mana  pat{y3iisha(n)  v^shna  Aur^- 
mazdaha  m^na  b^(n)d^ka  aha(n)ta.  mana.  'bajim  ^a.ba- 
r^(n)ta  ty^sham  h^cam^  ath^hy  khsh^p<3;va  raucapa- 
tiva  ^ava  *a,kunavyata.  8.  Thatiy  Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy<3;  a(n)t^r  ima  d^hyav<3:  martiya  hya  ag^ta 
aha  avam  ^(h)ub<^rt^m  ab^r^m  hya  arik<^  ah^:  av^m 
(h)uirastam  ap<^rs^m  v<3:shna  Aur^m^zdah^  ima  da- 
hyav^  ty^na  m^na  data  ap<3;riyay^(n)  y<^thasham  ha- 
cam^  ^ath^hy  av<3;tha  ^akun^vy^^ita.  9.  Thatiy  Dara- 
yava(h)ush  khshay<3:thiy<^  Aur<^m^zda  m<3:na  khsh<i:tr^m 
irahara  Aur<^m(^zdam^iy  up^stam  ^ahara  'yata  im^ 
khsh<^tr<3;m  *°adary  v^shna  Aur^m^zdah^  im^  khsh^- 
tr^m   "dar<^yamiy.  10.      Thatiy     Dar<2y^v^(h)ush 

khshay<^thiy<3:  im<2:  ty<3;  m<?na  "k^rt^m  pasava  y^itha 
khshay<7thiy^  ab<3:v^m  Ka(m)huyiya  nama  Kur<7ush 
putva  amakh<2m  t<2umaya  ^^hauv  p^ruv^m  ida  khshay^- 
thiy<^ aha  avrt:hya  K<^(m)buj iy<^hya  brata  B^rdiy*^  ''^nam^ 
aha  h^mata  h<3;m(3:pita  K<3:(m)bujiy<2hya  pasava  Ka(m)- 
bujiy^  av^m  B<2rdiy<3:m  ^^avaja  y^^tha  Krt'(m)bujiy^ 
B<3:rdiy<3:m  avaj^  kar^hya  n^iy  azda  ahava  tya  B^^rdiy^^; 
ava]ata  pasava  K<3:(m)buji}^  Mudrayrt-m  ashiy<^v<3: 
y^tha  Krt'(m)bujiy^  Mudray^m  ashiy^v^  pasava  kara 
arik^  ab^^v^  pasava  drauga  d^hy^uva  v^siy  ab^v^  uta 
Pars^iy  uta  Mad^iy  uta  aniyauva  d^hyushuva. 
11.  Thatiy  T) ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay^thiy^  pasava  I 
mrtrtiy<^  M^^gush  ah<^  G<2umat<2  nam^  h^uv  ud<3:p^t<7:ta 
h<3;ca  P^ishiyauvadaya  Ar<3:k^drish  nama  k<3:uf^  haca. 

1  bajim.  20.       *  a.haTa{n)ta,  44,  2.      ^  ^va,  27.      ■*  akun^vyata,  45, 
N.  3.      s  (h)ub^?rt^m,  64,  b.      «  athahy,   45,  N.  4;  50.  N.      ^  akun^v- 
yrtta,  42.     ^  abara,  44.     ®  yata,  95.     1°  adary,  50.     ^  ^  danzyamiy  46 
i2kflrtam,  53.     i^hauv,  28.     i  ^  nama,  23,  b.       -        - 


56 

Sivadasha  Yiyakhnahya  mahya  XIV  '  r<3;uc^bish  tha- 
katSL  oha  yadiy  udayatata.  hauv  karahyd.  av^tha  'adu- 
rujiy^  a.dam  B^rdiy^  amiy  hya  Kur^ush  putr^  K^(m)- 
bujiy^hya  brata  pasa.va  kara  haruva  h^mitriy^  ab^v^ 
h^ca  K^(m)bujiya  abiy  SLvam  ashiy^v<3!  uta  Tarsa  uta 
Mad<3:  uta  aniya  d^hyav^  khsh^tr<3:m  h^uv  3.garha.yata. 
Garmapadahya  mahya  IX  r<^uc^bish  th^ik^ta  aha 
av^tha  khsh(3;tr<3:m  agarhayata  pasava  'Ka(^m)hu]iya 
(h)uvam^rshiyush  am^riy^ta.  12.  Thatiy  Damy^- 
v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  aita  khsh<2tr^m  tya  G<3:umata  ^ 
hya  Magush  ^adina  K«(m)bujiy«m  aita  khsh^tr^m 
h^ca  paruvlyata  amakh<2m  t^umaya  ah^  pasava  Gau- 
mata  hya  M<3;gush  adina  K<3:(m)bujiy^m  uta  Pars^m 
uta  Mad^m  uta  aniya  d<3:hyav<^  h<3;uv  ay<3:sta  uvaip<7shi- 
yam  akut<3;  h^uv  khshay^thiy^  ahava.  13.  Thatiy 
Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^s:  n^iy  aha  martiya  na'iy 
Varsa  naiy  Mad^  n^iy  amakh<3;m  t<3:umaya  ^k^^shciy  hy<3; 
avam  G<2umat^m  ty<2m  Magum  khsh<2tr<2m  dit^^m 
*c^khriya  kar<2shim  h^ca  darshama  at^rs^  kar^m  v^siy 
avaj^niya  hya  paranam  B^rdiy<3;m  adana  av<a;hy<^radiy 
kar^m  avaj^niya  '^maty^mam  khshnasatiy  ty^;  ad^m 
n^iy  B<3:rdiy^  amiy  hy^  Kur<7ush  putr^  k^shciy  n^iy 
ad^rshn^ush  cishciy  th^st^n^iy  p^riy  G^umat^m  ty^m 
M^gum  yata  adam  avasam  pasava  adam  Aur^m^zdam 
p<3;tiyav<^h^iy  Aur^m^zdam^^iy  up^stam  ahava  Bag<3:- 
yad^ish  mahya  X  r^uc^bish  th^k^ta  ah^  av^tha  ad<a:m 
h^da  k<3!m^n^ibish  martiy^ibish  av^m  G^umat^m  tyam. 
M^gum  avaj^n^m  uta  ty<2ish<3:iy  iraiama  martiya 
anushiya  ah<a:(n)ta  Sik^y^uv^tish  ^nama*  dida  Nisay^ 
nama  d^hyaush  Mad^iy  av^d<3:shim  avaj^n^m  ^khsh^- 
tr^mshim  ad^m  adin^m  v^shna  Aur^m^zdah^  ad^m 

*For  forms  nam<7  and  nama  cf.  the  Grammar;  but  see  Bar- 
tholomae,  Arische  Forsch.  I,  58;  also  Thumb,  Zeitsch.  fiir  vergl. 
Sprachforsch.   (1891) 

1  rrtucrtbish,  23.  *  adurujiy^/,  45.  *  adina,  43.  *  k^shciy,  31 . 
•cflkhriya,  47.  «  maty^rmam,  101,  A.  ^  nama,  24;  61,  A,  Note  2. 
*  khshatrarashim  ad^/m  zdxnam,  64. 


57 

khshay<i:thiy^  ahavam  Aur^m^izda  khsh<3:tr<7m  m^^na 
irsihara.  14.  Thatiy  Darrt:y<^v^(h)ush  khshay<7thiy^ 
khsh^tr<3;m  ty^  ^h^ca  amakh^m  t^umaya  parahartam 
aha  dva  adam  patipadam  akunavam  ad^^mshim 
*gathva^  avastay^m  y^tha  paruvamciy  av^tha  ad^m 
akun^v^m  ayadana.  tya  Gaumata  hya  M<3:gush,viy^k^ 
adam  niyatrarayam  kar^^hya  abac^rish  g^ithamca 
maniy^mca  3v(i)thibishca  tyadish  G<3:umat^  hya  M^gush 
adina  ad^m  kar^m  gathva  avastay<^m  Pars^mca  Ma- 
d^mca  uta  aniya  d^hyav^  y^tha  p<3:ruv<2mciy  av^tha 
ad^m  tya  parabartam  patiyaharam  v^shna  Aura- 
m<2zdah<7  ima  adam  akun^v^m  ad^m  h^m(3:t(7khsh^iy 
yata  v(i)th<3:m  tyam  amakh^m  gathva  avastay^^m 
y<2tha  p^ruv^mciy  av^^tha  ad^tm  hamatakhshaiy 
v^shna  AuramayAaha  y^tha  G^umat<^  hya  M^gush 
v(i)th^m  tyam  amakh^m  na'iy  parabara.  15.  Thatiy 
Dar<3:y^v<^(h)ush  khshay<^thiy<7  ima  tya  adam  akuna- 
vam pasava  y^tha  khshay^thiy^  ahavam.  16.  Thatiy 
T> ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay<7:thiy<3:  y^tha  ad^m  G^umat^m 
tyrt:m  M^gum  avajanam  pasava  I  martiya  Atrina 
nama  \Jpadara(n)mahya  putr^  h^uv  udrt:prtt^ta 
(H)uvaiaiy  kar^hya  av^tha  athaha  adam  (R)uva]aiy 
khshay^thiy^  amiy  pasava  (H)uv<7Jiya  h^^mitriya  ab^- 
va(n)  ably  avam  Atrin^m  ashiy<2v^(n)  h^uv  khshay^- 
thiy^  ab^v^  (H)uvaiaiy  uta  I  martiya  Babiruviy^ 
N^dit^bir^  nama  Aina  -  -  hya  putr^  h^uv  ud^p^t^ta 
Babir^uv  kar^m  av<ztha  adurujiy^  ad^^m  N<^buk(u)dr^- 
cava  amiy  hya  N^bunit^hya  putr^z  p^sav^  kar^  hy^ 
Babiruviya  haruva  abiy  avam  N<3:dit«bir^m  ashiy^v^x 
Babirush  h^mitriy^  ab<3;v^  khsh<^tr^m  tya  Babir^uv 
hauv     ag^rbay<a:ta.  17.     Thatiy     Dar<^y<?V(^(h)ush 

khshay<^thiy<3;     pf^-sav^^     adrt;m      (kar^m)    '^fraish^y^^m 

*It  is  possible  to  regard  this  form  as  a  locative  (gathava)  with  post- 
positive a  (cf.  note  on  {H)ufratauva  I,  19;  but  the  instrumental  seems 
preferable). 

1  h<7ca  amakh^m  taumaya,  76.  ^  gathva,  73.  '  v(i)thibishca,  70,  a. 
'*  fraish^yrtm  (H)uvajam,  66. 


58 

(H.)uva]am  hauv  Atrin^  hasta  anayata,  abiy  mam 
ad<^mshim  a.va.]anam.  18.  Thatiy  Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush 
khshay^zthiy<a;  pas3.va  a.dam  Babirum  ashiy^v^m  abiy 
av^m  N^ditrtbir^m  hy^  ^^ahuk(u)dracara  ag^ub^ta 
kara  hya  It^aditahirahya.  Tigram  adar^^y^  aisht^ta  uta 
abish  naviya  ah^  pasa,va  ad^m  kar^m-m^kauva  ava- 
"kanam  aniy^m  d^sh^barim  akun^v^m  a,niyahya.  ashm 
.  .  .  ^n^y^m  Auramazda.maiy  up^stam  shara  v<^shna 
Auramazdsha  Tigram  viy^t^^r^yam^  av<^da  kar<3:m 
ty^m  N^dit^bir^^hya  ad^^m  a.]anam  vasiy  Atriyadiy^- 
hy^  mahya  'XXVII  r^uc^bish  thakatd.  aha  av^tha 
hamaranam  akuma.  19.  Thatiy  Da.rayava(h.)ush 
khshay^thiy^  p^^sav^  ad^m  Babirum  ashiy^v^m  athiy 

Babirum  y<2tha ay<2m  Zazan^  nam^  v^rd^- 

n^m  ^anuv  (H)ufrat^uva*  av^da  h^uv  N^xdit^^bir^  hy^ 
Nrtbuk(u)dr^c^r^  ag<^ub«ta  aisha  ^h^da  kara  ^p^tish 
mam  h^m^r^n^m  cartana'iy  pasava  h^m^^r^n^m  akuma 
Aur^m^zdam^iy  up^stam  ahara  v^shna  Aur^m^zdah<2 
kar<7;m  ty^m  N^dit^bir^^hya  ad^m  aj^^n^m  v^siy  aniy^ 
apiya  -  h  -  -  a  .  .  apishim  parahara  Anam^k^hy^ 
mahya  *II  r^uc^bish  th^k<3;ta  ah^  av^tha  h^m^r^n^m 
akuma. 

*(H)ufrrttmva:  The  a  which  occurs  at  the  end  of  this  locative 
termination  is  doubtless  the  prefix  a  of  ths  Sanskrit.  For  a  full  dis- 
cussion of  this  postpositive  a;  cf.  Bazzenbergers  Beitrage,  XIII;  also 
for  the  same  postpositive  a  in  Avestan,  cf  Jackson  Am,  Or.  Society 
Proceedings  (1889)  and  Kuhns   Zeitschrift.  XXXI.      Cf.   Grammar, 

IC.  F. 

*  Nrtbuk(u)dr^c«rez  ag<zub«ta,  Gl,  B.  ^XXVII  r^uc^bish,  72. 
»  anuv  (Hjufratrruva,  84.  *  h<7da  kara,  70.  "^  p^rtish  mam -c<^tan<7iy, 
54.  N.;  60,  B;  94.     « II  raucabish.  60,  C. 


59 


II. 


1.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v<^(h)ush  hkshay<?thiy^  pasa.va 
T<^aditahira  hada.  k<2m<^n<^ibish  asbaribish  abiy  Babirum 
Rshiyava  pasa.va  a.dam  Babirum  ashiy^v^m  v^shna 
Aur^m^^zdah^  uta  Babirum  ag<3;rbay^m  uta  av^m 
NrtJdit^bir^m  ag^rbay<3:m  pas3.va  a.vam  N<^dit<7bir^m 
a.dam  Babimuv  avaj^n<7m.  2.  Thatiy  Dar<3;yrtv<7(h)ush 
khshay^thiy(3:  yata  ad^m  Babir<2uv  sham  ima  d^^hyav^ 
tya  h^cam^  h^^mitriya  ab^v«(n)  Pars^  (ll)\ivaja  Mad^ 
Athura  Arming  Farthava  M^rgush  Th^^t^gush  S^k^. 
3.  Thatiy  Dar^y<3;v<3:(h)ush  khshay<7thiy^  I  m^rtiy^ 
Martiya  na.ma  Cicikhraish  putr<3;  'Kug<^n«ka  nam<^ 
v^rdrtn^m  Pars^iy  av^da  adamy^  h^uv  udapatata. 
(H)uva]a\y  kar^hya  av^tha  ath<2h^  ad<^m  Im(^nish 
amiy  (V[)uvd]aiy  khshay^thiy^.  4.  Thatiy  Da.raya- 
\7z(h)ush   khshay^thiy^  adrtk^iy  ad<3:m  ashn^^iy  ah^m 

abiy    (H)uvrtj^nTi    p^sav^^    h<^cam<2 (H)uv«jiya 

av^^m  Martiycim  agrtrbayrt(n)  hy^sham  m<^thisht<^  aha 
utashim  avaj<7n«(n).  5.  Thatiy  D  a.r  ay  av  a  (h)ush. 
khshayrtthiyrt  I  m^rtiy^^  Fr^v^^rtish  nam^o:  Mad^  h^uv 
ud^^p^t^ta  Mard^iy  kar^^hya  av^xtha  atht^h^  ad^m 
Khshrtthrit^  amiy  (H)uvrtkhshrt:t(7mhya  t<^umaya 
pasa.va  ka.ra  Mada  hya  v(i)thap(^tiy  ah^  hacama 
hrt;mitriy<7  abava  abiy  av<^m  Fr^v^rtim  ashiy<^v^  h^xuv 
khshayrtthiy<^  ab^v<^  Mad^iy.  6.  Thatiy  'Davaya- 
vrt(h)ush  khshay<7:thiy^  kar«  Pars^  uta  Mad^a;  hy<^  upa 
mam  ah^a;  'h<^uv  k^m^n^^m  ah^  p^sav^:  adrt'm  kamm 
fraish(7y<^m  Vid^rn^  nam^  Pars^  m^na  b^(n)d«k^ 
av^msham  m^thisht^m  akun^v^m  avrt:thasham  ath«- 
h^m  p^^r^ita  av^m  kar^m  ty^m  Mad<a:m  j^ta  hy^  mrt:na 
n^iy  g^ub^t^iy  p^sav^a:  h^uv  Yidavna  hada.  kara  ashi- 
yawa  y^tha  Mad^^m  p^rar^s^  Ma  .  .  .  nam<2  v^rd^n^m 
Mad^iy  av<^da  hamaranam  akun^^ush  h^da  Mad^^ibish 
hy^  Mad<3;ishuva  m^thisht<^  aha  hauv  ad<3:k<^iy  kama- 
n^mciy  n^iy  a.daraya  Aur^m^zdam^iy  up<2stam  ahava 

^  Kug^q^ka  m.va.a,  61  a,  Note  2.      ^  h^zuv  ]s.amavL(im  aha,  8G  a. 


6o 

v^shna  Auramazdaha  ksLva  hya  Vid^rn<2hya  av^m 
kar^m  tyam  h^mitriy^^m  a.]a  vasiy  Ana.makahya 
mahya  VI  r^uc^bish  th<2k<3:ta  aha  ^ av<3:thasham  hama- 
ranam  kartam  pasa.va  hauv  kara  hya  mana,  K^(m)- 
pada  nama  d^hyaush  Mad^iy  av^da  mam  cita  ama- 
naya  yata  ad^m  a.rasam  Mad^m.  7.  Thatiy  Da.ra- 
yava(K)ush.  khshay^thiy^  pasava  Dad^arshish  nam^ 
Arminiy<^  m<^na  ha(n)daka  av^m  ad^im  fraish^y^^m 
Arminrt;m  av^thash^^iy  athrt;h(^m  p^rrt:idiy  kar<?;  hya 
h^mitriy^  m^na  naiy  gauhataiy  av^m  j^-diy  p^sav^ 
Dad^rshish  ashiyava  y^tha  Armin^-m  pararasa  pasava 
h^mitriya  ''ha(n)gmata.  p<^r<2ita  p^^tish  Dad^^rhim  ha- 

maranam    cartanaiy nam<i;    avahanam.   Arm^- 

niy^^iy  av^^da  h^^m^mn^m  akunava(n)  Aiir<i'm(^zdam(^iy 
uprtjstam  ahara  v^shna  Aur^m<7zdah<^  kam  hya  mana, 
a.vam  kar^m  ty<3;m  hrt-mitriy^im  .  .  a]a  vas'iy  Thur<3:va- 
havahya  mahya  VI  r^uc^bish  ihakata.  aha  av<^thasham 
hamaranam  k^rt^'^m.  8.  Thatiy  Dar^y(^vrt(h)ush 
khshayrtthiy<7  p<?tiy  duvitiy^-m  h^^mitriya  ha(\\)g\'nata 
paraita  p^tish  Dad^rshim  hamarauam  Qartanaiy  Tigr^ 
nama  dida  Arm^niy<^iy  av^da  h^m^Tr^^in^^m  ak\xnava{n) 
Aur^^m^^zdam^^-iy  up^stam  ahara  v<7shna  Aumm^zdah^ 
kar^  hy^  m<7na  av^m  kar^m  ty^m  h^imitriy^m  a]a 
was'iy  Thur^vah^mhy^  mahya  XVIII  r^uc^bish  th^- 
k^ta  ah^  av^thasham  h^'m^r^n^m  kaviava.  9.  Tha- 
tiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  p<^tiy  tritiy^m 
h<2mitriya  ha(n)gma\.a.  p^^r^ita  p^-tish  Dad^rshim  ha- 
m^r^n^m  cavtanaiy  U  .  .  .  .  am^;  nama  dida  Arm^- 
niy<?iyav^da  hamaYanava  akunrtv^(n)  Aur^m^zdam^iy 
uprt-stam  ahara  v^shna  Aur^-m^zdah^  kar^  hy^  m^?na 
av^m  kar^m  ty^m  h^mitriy^m  a]a  vasxy  Thaig^rc^-ish 
mahya  IX  r^ucrt;bish  thakaia.  aha  av<'7thasham  h^m^- 
rarxam  k^rt^m  p^sav^  Dad^rshish  cita  mam  aman^y^ 
.  a.  .  .  yata  ad^-m  arasavn  Mad^m.  10.  Thatiy  Dar<^7- 
y^v^(h)ush     khshay<'?thiy^    p^rsav^    V^umis^     nanirt! 

*  avrtthasham,  GO,  c.     *  h//(n)gm^ta,   80,  c. 


6i 

Pars^  mana.  ha(n)da]<a  av^m  a.dam  fraish^^iy^m  Armi- 
n^m  av^thashrtiy  ath^^h^m  paraidiy  kara  hya  ham'i- 
triya  mana.  naiy  gauhataiy  av^m  j^diy  p^sav^a: 
V^umis^  Sishiyava  yatha,  Armin^m  pararasa  pasa.va 
h^mitriya     ha(n)gmata,     paraita     p<?tish    Vrt;umis<3:m 

hamaranam  cartanaiy  -  -  I nama  d^hyausk  Athu- 

raya  av^da  hamaranara  akun^v^(n)  Aur^m^zdajn^iy 
up^stam  ahara  v^shna  Auramazdaha  kara  hya  mcma. 
a,vam  kar-^m  tyam  h<^mitriy^m  a]a  vasly  Anam^k^hy^ 
mahya  XV  muc^bish  th<^k<^ta  aha  av^thasham  hama- 
ranam kartam.  11.  ThatiyDar<2:y<2v^(h)ushkhshay<a:- 
thiya  pat'iy  duvltiyam  h^mitriya  ha(n)gmata,  p^r^ita 
p^tish  V<?umis^m  hamaranam.  cartanaiy  Autiyar^ 
nama  d^hyaush  Armin^iy  av^da  hamaranam  akun^- 
v^(n)  Aur^m<?zdam(^iy  up^stam  ahara  v<3;shna  Aur^- 
m<3:zdah<2  kar^  hya  m^na  a.wam  karam  tyam  h^mi- 
tiiyam  aja  vasiy  Thuravaharahya  mahya  -  iyamanam 
patiy  av<^thasham  hamaranam  kartam  pasava  Vau- 
misa  cita  mam  amanaya  Armin^iy  yata  ad^m  ar^s^^m 
Mad<^m.  12.  Thatiy  D ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay^thiy<3: 
p^sav^  ad<^m  nijay^m  haca,  Babir^ush  ashiy^v<a;m 
Mad<a;m  y<3:tha  Mad«m  para.rasam  Kud(u)rush  na,ma 
vardanam  Mad^^iy  av^da  h^uv  Fr^v^rtish  hya  Mad^iy 
khshay<7thiy^  agauhata.  aish^  h^da  kara  p^tish  mam 
hamaranam  cartanaiy  p^sav^  h^m^r^n^m  akuma 
Aur^m^zdam^?iy  up^stam  ahara  v<?shna  Aur^m^zdah^ 
kar^m  ty^m  Fr<2v^rt(^ish  ad<2:m  a.]anam.  vasiy  Aduk^- 
n<3:ish  mahya  XXVI  r<^uc<3:bish  th^k^ta  ah<3:  av^tha 
hamaranam  akuma.  13.  Thatiy  D  a.r  ay  av  a  (h)ush 
khshay<2thiy^  p^sav*^  h^uv  Fr^v<3;rtish  h<2:da  \:ama- 
n^ibish  asbaribish  amuth<3:  Raga,  nama  d.'zhyaush 
Mad^iy  a^vada.  ashiy^v<a;  pasa.va  adam  kar^m  fraish^- 
yam  ^tyaipatiy  Fr<3;v^rtish  ""  agarhayata.  anayata.  abiy 
mam  ad^msh^iy  uta  nah<3;m  uta  g^^usha  uta  izavam 
hajanam    utash^iy ma    a,va]am    duv^r^yam<a:iy 

1  tyrtip^tiy,  88,  b.     ^  ago rha.yata.  anayata,  89,  b. 


62 

hasta  adariy  h^ruv^shim  kara  a.valna  passiva  ad^m 
H^(n)gm«tan^iy  uzamayapatiy  akun<^v<3;m  uta  mar- 
tiya  tyaishaiy  iratama.  anushiya  ahrt;(n)ta  av^iy 
¥la(n)gmata.naiy  a(n)t<?r  didam  frah«(n)j<^m.  14. 
Thatiy  Dar^y«v<^(h)ush  khshayrtthiy^  I  martiya 
Citra(n)t^khm^  na.ma  Asagartiya  h^uvm<3:iy  hami- 
tr'xya  abava  kar^^hya  av^tha  a.thaha  ad<2m  khshay^- 
thiya  amiy  As^g^^rt^iy  (H)uvakh.shatarahya.  t^umaya 
pasa.va  ad^m  kar^m  Pars^m  uta  Mad^^rn  fraish<3:y^m 
T^khm^spad^  nam^  M3.da  mana.ha(n)daka  av^^msham 
m<7thisht^m  akunavam  av^aithasham  Sithaham.  paraitdi 
kar<7m  tyavs\  h<7mitriy^m  hya  m^na  na'iy  gauhditaiy 
av^m  j^ta  p^sav^  T^khm<?spad^  h^da  kara  ashiy^v^ 
hamaranam  akun<2ush  h^da  Citr<3;(n)t^khma  Aur^m<^z- 
dam^iiy  up<?stam  dhava  v^shna  Auramazdaha  ka.ra  hya 
mana.  a.vam  kanzm  tyam  hamitriyam  a.]a  uta  Citr<3:(n)- 
t<^khmrt:m  agarha.ya  ax\.aya  abiy  mam  p^sav^sh^iy 
adrt;m  uta  nah<3;m  uta  g^usha  fraj^n^m  utashrt'iy  -  - 
shm^  avrtj<2m  duv<2r<^yam<a:iy  b^st^  adariy  h^ruv^shim 
kar^  a.va\xia  p^sav^shim  Arbiraya  uz<3:m^yap<a:tiy  aku- 
r\avavci.  15.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v<a:(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3: 
im^  ty^  m^na  k^^rt^m  Mad^iy.      16.  Thatiy  'Daxaya- 

v<^(h)ush  khshay<2thiy<3:  P«rth<3:v^  uta  Narka.na 

va Fr^v^rt<3!ish ag<3:ub<3:ta    V(i)shtaspa 

m^na    pita  h kar^    a.vahar atara    pasava 

V(i)shtasp^  ab anushiya ay^  Visp<3:uz  -- 

tish  nam^  v^rd^n^m da  h^m^r^^n^m   akun^v^ 

avtfthasham  h^m^r^nam  k^rt^m. 


63 


III. 


1.  Thatly  Dar^y<^v<^(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3!  p^sav^ 
3.dam  kar^m  Pars^m  fraish«y<^m  abiy  V(i)shtasp^m  haca. 
R<7gaya  y<^tha  hauv  ka.ra  pararasa  abiy  V(i)shtasp^m 
p«sav<3;V(i)shtasp(3;  ay<3:sta  av^m  kar^m  ashiy^v^  Vati- 
^rabami  n3.ma  vardanam  Tarthavaiy  a,vada.  hamavanam 
akun^ush  h^da  h^a-mitriymbish  Auramazda.maiy  upas- 
tam  ahara  vashna  Auramazdaha  V(i)shtasprt;  avam 
kar^m  tyam  h^mitriy<3:m  aja  vasiy  Garmapadahya 
mahya  *I  rauca  th^krt:ta  ah^  av^thasham  hamaranam 
kartam.  2.  Thatiy  Dar<7y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^ 
yasava  d<3:hyaush  mana  ahava  ima  tya  mana  kartam 
Varthavaly.  3.  Thatiy  Dar^y<^V(^(h)ush  khshay<3:thiydf 
M<7rgush  nama  d^hyaush  h<^uvm^iy  h^shitiy^  ahava 
'I  martiya  Frad^  nama  Mavgava  avam  m^thisht^m 
akun^v<2(n)ta  p^sav^  ad<3:m  3fraish^y<3;m  Dad^rshish 
nama  Farsa  mana  b^(n)d^k^  Bakhtriya  khsh^xtr^pava 
abiy  avam  avathashaiy  ath<3:h<3:m  p^r^idiy  av^m  kamm 
j<3:diy  hy^  mana  naiy  gauhataiy  pasava  Dad^rshish 
hrt:da  kara  ashiy^v^  hamaranam  akun^ush  h^da  Mar- 
g<7y<^ibish  Auramazdamaly  up^^stam  ahara  v^shna 
Aur^m^zdah^  kar^  hya  m^na  avam  karrttm  .  .  tyam 
h^^rnitriy^m  a]a  v^siy  Atriyadiy<^hy^  mahya  XXIII 
r<3:uc<a;bish  th^k^ta  ah^  av^^thasham  hamaranam  kar- 
tam. 4.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^iJthiy^  p^sa- 
v^  d<2:hyaush  m^na  ahava  ima  tya  mana  kartam 
Bakhtriya.  5.  Thatiy  D ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay^thiy^ 
I  martiya  Vahyazdata  nama  Tar^va  nama  vardanam 
Yutiya  nama  d^hyaush  Pars^iy  av^da  adar^y^  hauv 
■duvitiy^m  ud<3:p<3:t^ta  Pars^iy  kar^hya  av^tha  athaha 
ad^m  B<a:rdiy^  amiy  hy^  Kur<2ush  putr^  pasava  kara 
Tarsa  hya  v(i)thaprttiy  h^ca  yadaya  iratarta  hauv 
l[\acama  h^mitriy^  ab^v^  abiy  av^m  V^hy^zdat^m 
ashiy^v^  h^uv  khshay^thiy^  ab^v^  Pars^iy.      6.  Tha- 

1 1  vawca,  46,  a.     ^  j  martiya  Frada  -  avam,  61,  A.       ■  fraishayam 
Dadarshish,  61,  a,  Note  1. 


64 

tiy  D3irayava(h)ush.  khshay<3;thiy^  pas3.va  adam  kar<?m 
Pars<^m  uta  Mad^m  iraishayam  hya  upa  mam  aha 
Artavardiya  nama  Pars<3;  mana  hai^n^daka  av^msham 
m^thisht^m  akun^v<7m  hya  aalya  kara  Varsa  ^pasa 
mana  ashiy^v^  Mad<7m  pasava  Artavardiya  hada  kara 
ashiyava  Pars<3:m  y^tha  Pars<3;m  pararasa  R^kha  nam^ 
vardanam  Pars^iy  av<a:da  h^uv  Yahyazdata  hya  Bar- 
d'lya  agauhata  aish^  h<3:da  kara  p<7tish  Artavardiyam 
h^^m^rrt-n^^m  cartanaiy  p^sav^x  h^m^r^in^m  akun^vrt(n) 
Aur^m^zdam^iy  up^stam  ahara  v^shna  Aur<7m^zdah<3! 
kar^i:  hya  m«na  av^m  kar^m  ty^m  V ahyazdatahya 
a]a  Yas\y  Thur^^vah^^r^hy^  mahya  XII  raucah'ish  tha- 
kata  aha  av^thasham  hamaranam  k^^rt^m.  7.  Thatiy 
D ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay<2thiy<3:  p^sav^  hauv  Yahyaz- 
data hada  k^^m^ri^ibish  as^^baribish  amuth^  ashiy^v^ 
Prt;ishiyauvadam  haca  avadasha  kar^^m  ay^^sta  hyap^- 
r^m  aish^  p^^itish  Art<3:v^rdiy<^m  h^m^r^n^m  cartanaiy 
Yaraga  nam^  kauia  av^da  h^^m^^r^n^m  akun^v«(n) 
Aur^^m^zdam^iy  up^stam  ahara  v^shna  Aur^m(7zdah<i: 
kar«  hya  m^na  av^m  kar<^m  ty^m  V^hy^zdat^hy^ 
aja  vasiy  Garmapadahya  mahya  VI  r^uc<7:bish  th^k^ita 
aha  av<3:thasham  hamaranam  kartam  uta  av^^m  Ya- 
hy^zdat^m  ag^rbay^(n)  uta  m^rtiya  ty^ish^iy  fr^t^ma 
anushiya  ah^(n)t«  ag^rbay^(n).  8.  Thatiy  Daraya- 
v<2(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  p^sav^  ad^m  av^m  V^hy<2z- 
dat^m  uta  m^rtiya  tyc-zish^iy  fr^t^ma  anushiya 
ah^(n)t^  Uvadrtid^y^  nam«  v^rd^n^OTn  Pars^iy  awa- 
d^shish  uz^mrtiyap^tiy  akun<2v^m.  9.  Thatiy  Dara- 
y^v^(h)ush  khshay<^thiy^  h^uv  V^hy^zdat^  hy^  B^r- 
diy^  agrtubrt:ta  h^uv  kar^im  fraish^y<a;  H^r^uv^tim 
Vivan«  nam^  Pars<2;  m^na  brt(n)d<^k^  H<^rrt:uv«tiya 
khsh^tr^pava  abiy  av^m  utasham  I  m^rtiy^m  ma- 
thishtrtm  akun^ush  av^thasham  ath^h^:  p^r^ita  Viva- 
rium j^ta  uta  av^m  kar^m  hy^  Dar^y^v^hush 
khshay^thiy^hya  g^ub^t^iy  p^sav^  h^uv  kara  ashiya- 

1  pasa  mana,  80,  b. 


6s 

ya  ty^m  V^hy^zdat^  fraish^y^  abiy  Vivan^m  hama- 
ranam  cartanaiy  Kapish^kanish  nama  dida  av^da 
hamaranam  akun<2v^(n)  Auramazdamaly  up^stam 
abara  v^shna  Auramazdaha  ksiva  hya  mana,  a.vam 
karam  tyam  h^mitriy^m  a.]a  vasiy  Anam^k^hy^  ma- 
hya  XIII  r^uc<2bish  th^k^ta  aha  ^av^thasham  hama- 
ranam kartam.  10.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v<3:(h)ush  khshay^- 
thiya  p^tiy  hyaparam  h^mitriya  ha(n)gmata,  paraita. 
p^tish  Vivan<3:m  hamaranam  cartanaiy  Ga(n)dutava 
nama  d<3:hyaush  av^^da  hamaranam  akun^v^(n)  Aur^- 
m^zdam^iy  up<3;stam  ahara  v<3:shna  Aur<3:m^zdah^  kar<3: 
hya  mana,  a.vam  kar<3;m  tyam  hamitriyam  a]a  wasiy 
Yiyakhnahya  mahya  VII  rawcahish  th^k^ta  aha  a,wa- 
thasham  hamaranam  kartam.  11.  Thatiy  Dar^y^- 
v^(h)ush  khshay<2thiy^  p<3:sav^  h^uv  martiya  hya 
av^^hya  kar^hya  m^thisht^  aha  tyam  YahyazdaXa 
iraishaya  abiy  Vivan<3:m  h^uv  m^thisht<3:  h<3:da  kama- 
n^ibish  as<3;baribish  ashiy<2v<3:  Arshada  nama  dida 
}laraMvat\ya.  a.vapara.  atiyaish<3;  p^sav^  Vivan^  h<2:da 
kara  *nip^diy  ty<2iy  ashiy<^v^  av^dashim  a.garha.ya 
uta  m^rtiya  ty^ish^iy  iratama,  anushiya  ah^(n)ta 
avaj^.  12.  Thatiy  Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush  khshay^thi}^^ 
pasa.va  d^hyaush  m^na  ab^v^  im<3:  ty^  m^na  k^rt^-m 
H^r^uv^tiya.  13.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay<3:- 
thiy^  yata  ad^m  Pars^iy  uta  Mad^iy  ah^m  p^tiy 
duvitiy^m  Babiruviya  h<3:mitriya  ab^v^(n)  h^cam<a:  I 
m<a:rtiy^  Ar<a:kh^  nam<3;  Arminiy^  H^n(?)dit^hy^  putr<35 
hauv  ud<3:p<2t(^ta  Babir<3;uv  Duban(?)^  nama  d<2:hyaush 
h^ca  a,vadasha  hauv  ud^p<3:t^ta  av<3:tha  adurujiy^  ad^m 
"^ahukudracara  amiy  hy^  N(3:bunit<3;hya  putr^  p^sav^ 
kara  Babiruyiy^  haca.ma  h^mitriy<3:  abava  abiy  av^m 
Amkh^m  ashiy^v^  Babirum  hauv  ag(^rbay<3;ta  h^uv 
khshay^thiy<3!  ab^v^  Babir<3:uv.  14.  Thatiy  Daraya- 
v<3;(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  pasa.va  adam  kar<3:m  fraish<3:- 
y<3;m  Babirum  Vi(n)d^fra  nam^  Mad<2  m^na  b^(n)d<2k^ 

^  avflthasham  hamaranam  kartam,  80,  a.     *  nipadiy,  84,  a. 


66 

avam  m^thisht^m  akun^v^m  av<3!thasham  dLthaham  pa- 
raita.  a.vam  karam  tyam  Babir<3:uv  ]ata,  hya  mam,  naiy 
gauhataiy  p^sav<3;  Vi(n)d<3:fra  hada.  kara  ashiyava  abiy 
Babirum  Aur^mzdam^iy  up^stam  ahara  v^shna  Aur^- 

mazdaha  Vi(n)d^fra  Babirum  a.garha,ya mahya 

II  r^uc^bish  th^k^ta  aha  avatha  ava 

ap^tiy  a,sanyata.. 


67 

IV. 

1.  Thatiy  Da.rayava(h)ush.  khsha-yathiya  Ima   tya 
man3.  kartam  Babir<3;uv.      2.  Thatiy  D ar ay av a (h.)ush. 
khshay^thiy^  ima  tya  adam  akun^v<a:m  v^shna  Aur^- 
mazdaha  aha  hamahyaya  tharda  pasava  y^tha  khsha- 
y^thiya   h^mitriya   ahava(n)    adam    XIX    hamarana 
akun^v<;7m  v<2shna  Aur^m^zdah<3:  'ad^msham  ajanam 
uta    IX    khshay^thiya    agarhayam  I  G<2:umat<3;    nama 
Magush.  aha  hauv  adurujiy^  av^tha  athaha  adam  Bar- 
d\ya  amiy  hya  Kur^^ush  putr<3:    haww  Yaxsam.    hami- 
txiyam    akun^ush    1    K\.xma    nam«    (H)uv<2J<2iy    h^uv 
adurujiy^  avatha    athaha    adam    khshay^thiy<aj    amiy 
(H)uv^j<3;iy    h^uv    (H)uvaiam    h^mitriy<a:m    akun<7ush 
mana  I  N^dit^bir<3;  nama  Babiruviy<2  h^uv  adurujiy^ 
avatha  ath^h^a;  ad^m  Nabukudr^c^r^  amiy  hya  N^bu- 
nitrthy^  putr^  h^uv  Babirum  h^mitriy^m  akun^ush  I 
M^rtiy^  nam<3;  Parses;  h^uv  adurujiy^  avatha  ath^h^ 
ad^m   Im<3:nish  amiy   (H)uv^j«iy  khshay^thiy^    h^uv 
(H)uv^j^m  htxmitriy^m   akun^ush  I  Fr^v^rtish  nam^ 
Mad^   h^uv  adurujiy^  avatha   ath^h^   ad^m   Khsh^- 
thrit<2:  amiy  (il)uvakhshatarahya  t<2umaya  h<3:uv  Ma- 
d<a;m    h^mitriy^m    akun^ush  I  Citrrt(n)t<^khm<a:   nam^ 
Asagartiya    hauv    adurujiy^    avatha     athaha    adam. 
khshay<2:thiy^    amiy  Asagartaiy   (H)uv^khsh^t<3:r^hy^ 
t^umaya    h^uv    Asagartam     h^mitriy^m     akun^ush 
I  Frad<a!  nam<3;  Marg^v^  h^uv  adurujiy^  av<3:tha  athaha 
adam    khshay^thiy^   amiy    M^rg^uv    h^uv    M^rgum 
h^mitriy^m  akun^ush  I  V^hy^zdat^  nam^a;  Pars^  hauv 
adurujiy<3:  av<3:tha  athaha  adam  Bardiya  amiy  Kur^ush 
putra  hauv  Pars<2:m  h^mitriy^m   akun^ush  I  Ar^kh^a; 
nam^  Arminiy<a:  h^uv  adurujiy^  avatha  athaha  adam 
'Nahukudracara  amiy  hya  Nabunit^hy^a:    putr<3;    hauv 
Babirum  h^mitriy^m  akun<a;ush.      3.  Thatiy  Daraya- 
va(h)ush  khshay<2thiy^  im^iy  IX  khshay^thiy^  ad«m 
ag<2;rbay«m  a(n)t«r  ima  hamarana.     4.  Thatiy  Data- 

1  adflmsham  ajanam,  83,  b. 


68 

yava(h)ush.  khshay^thiy^  dahya.va  ima  tya  h^mitriya 
ab^v^(n)  draugadish  akun^^ush  ^tya  im^iykar^m  adu- 
rujiy<3:sh^(n)  pasRva  dish  Aur<3;m<a:zda  mana,  dastaya 
akun<3;ush  yaths.  'mam  kam^  av^tha  di  -  -  .  5.  Tha- 
tiy  Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  tuv^m  ka  khshay<3:- 
thiya  hya  a.param  ahy  ^haca.  dr^uga  d^rsh<3:m  patipa- 
y^uva  m^rtiy^  hya  drau]ana  ah^^tiy  av^m  (h)ufr<^st^m 
p^rsa  y^diy  avatha,  4m<^niyahy  d(a:hyaushm<^iy  duruva 
ah^tiy.  6.  Thatiy  Dar ay av a (h.)ush'khsh.a.yathiy a  ima 
tya  adam  akun^v^m  v^shna  Aur^m<2!zdah^  ^hama- 
hyaya  tharda  akun<2v^m  tuvam  ka  hya  aparam  imam 
dipim  ^p^tip^rsahy  tya  m^na  k^rt^^m  varnavatam 
'thuvam  maty<3J  durujiyahy.  7.  Thatiy  Darayava- 
(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  AuramavAa  taiyiya  y<3:tha  im<a: 
hashiyam  naiy  durukht<3:m  ad^m  akunrt;v<2m  hama- 
hyaya  tharda.  8.  Thatiy  D ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay^- 
thiy^  v^shna  Aur<2m^zdah«  --  am^iy  aniy^shciy  v^siy 
astiy  kartam  ava  ahyaya  dipiya  n^iy  nipisht^m  ava- 
hy^radiy  naiy  nipisht<2m  maty^  hya  aparam  imam 
dipim  p^tip<3:rsatiy  av^hya  paruv  tha  ....  tya  mana 
kartam  n<3:ishim  varnavatiy  durukht<3:m  m^niyatiy. 
9.  Thatiy  Dar«y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^^;  ty<3:iy  p^ruva 
khshay<2thiya  -  a  ah<2(n)  av^isham  n<3:iy  astiy  k^rt<a;m 
y<3:tha  m<3:na  v^shna  Aur<3:m<3:zdah<2  h^m^^hyaya  duvar- 
tam.        10.     Thatiy    Dar^y^v^(h)ush     khshay^thiy^ 

nur^m  thuvam  varnavatam  tya  mana  k^rt<a:m  ava- 

tha av^hy^radiy    ma    apagaudaya   yadiy   imam 

h<2(n)dugam  n<3:iy  ap^g^ud^yahy  kar^hya  thahy  Aura- 
mazda  thuvam  d^ushta  ^biya  utat^iy  t^uma  v^siy  biya 
uta  dra(n)gam  jiva.  11.  Thatiy  Dar^y«v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy^  y<3;diy  imam  h^(n)dugam  ap<3:g^ud^yahy 
n^iy  thahy  kar^hya  Aur^m^zdat^y  j^ta  biya  utat^iy 
t^uma  ma  biya.  12.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khsha- 
y«thiy<3J  im^  tya  ad^m  akun^v^m  h^m^hyaya  th^rd^ 

1  tya  imaiy  karam  adurujiyfl-shafn),  97.  '  mam  kam^z,  66.  "  hacB. 
drfluga,  77.  *  maniyahy,  91,  a.  «*  h</m«hyaya  th<7rdrt!,  80,  c.  •pati- 
parsahy,  91.     'thuvam  matya  durujiyahy,  89,  a.     ®  biya,  51,  N. 


TORARy 


69 

v<2shna  Auramazdaha  dkunavam  Aur<7m<3:zdam^iy 
up(^stam  ahara  uta  aniya  b^gah^  ty^iy  h«(n)tiy.  13. 
Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay<2thiy^  av<^hy^radiy 
Aur^m^zda  up<2stam  abara  uta  aniya  b^gah<3!  ty^iy 
h^(n)tiy  y^^tha  naiy  arika  aham  naiy  drau]ana  aham 

naiy    zurakara    a}\am im^iy     t^uma     up^riy 

ab<a:shtam  up^riy  mam   naiy  sh^k^urim huv^- 

tavci  zura  akun<3:vrt:m  ty^m<^iy  hy^  h^m^t^khsh^ta  ma- 
na  vithiya  av<^m  (h)ub<2rt^m  ab^r^m  hy^  iyani .  .  avam 
(h)ufr^st<^m  ap^rs^m.  14.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
khshay<2thiy^  'tuv^m    ka    khshay^thiy^  hy^  ap^r^m 

ahy  m^rtiy^  hy<3:  drau)ana  ah^tiy  hy<3;va  -  tar aha- 

tiy  av<^iy  ma  d^ushta  av^iy  ahiteshtadiy  p^rsa.  15. 
Thatiy  D ar ay av a (h.)ush.  khshay^thiy<3:  tuv^m  ka  hy<^ 
aparam  imam  dipim  v<^inahy  tyam  ad^m  niy^pish^m 
im<^iva  p^tik<3:ra  maty^  'vis^nahy  yava  jiv^^hy  ava(?) 
avrttha  p^rik<2ra.  16.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khsha- 
y^thiy^  y^diy  imam  dipim  v^inahy  im<7iva  p^tik<2ra 
n^iydish  vis^nahy  utam^iy  ^yava  t^uma  ah^^tiy  pari- 
k^rah^dish  Aur^m^zda  '♦thuvam  d^ushta  biya  utat^iy 
trtuma  v^siy  biya  uta  dra[n)gam  jiva  uta  ty^  kun«- 

vahy  av^t^iy  Aur^m^zda  m m  j<7:d^n^utuv.       17. 

Thatiy  Dar^y(^v«(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3:  y^-diy  imam 
dipim  im^iva  prt:tik<3:ra  v^inahy  vis^nah^idish  utam<3:iy 
yava  t^uma  ah^tiy  n^iydish  p^rik^^rahy  Aur^a^m^zda- 
t^iy  ]ata  biya.  utat^iy  t^uma  ma  biya  uta  tya  kuna- 
vahy  av<^t^iy  Aur^^m^zda  nik^(n)tuv.  18.  Thatiy 
Dar«y^v<2(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  im<a:iy  m^rtiya  ty^iy 
ad^k^iy  av^da  ah^(n)ta  yata  ad^m  G^umat^m  ty^m 
M^gum  avaj<^n^m  hy^  B<3:rdiy^  ag^ub^ta  ad<7k<3:iy 
im^iy  m^rtiya  h^m<3;t<3:khsh^(n)ta  anushiya  m^na 
Vi(n)d^fr^na  nam^  V^y^spar^hya  putm  Pars^  Utan^ 
nam^  Thukhr^hya  putr<3;  Pars^:  Gauharuva  nama  Mar- 
duniy^hya  putr^  Pars<3!  Vid^rn^  nam«  B^gabign<3!hya 

1  tuvrtm  ka,  62.       2  vig^nahy,  91,  d.      ^  yava  t^iuma  ah^tiy,  91,  e. 
*  thuvam  d^zushta  biya,  65. 


70 

putr^  Pars^  B^g^bukhsh^  nam«  Daduhy^hya  putr^ 
F3.rsa  Ardum^nish  nam^  V^h<3:uk^hya  putr^  Pars^. 
19.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v«(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3:  tuv^m  ka 
khshay^thiy^  hya  aparam  ahy  tyama  vidam  t^r- 
tiyana — tya  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  -  —  ----_-___ 
-  -  akun^v^m. 


71 


1.  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^    ima    tya 

ad^m  akunavam  ma  .  r thardam  -  -  tha  khsha- 

yathiya vajanam d<3:hyaush  h^uv  haca.- 

ma  h^mitriya  shava  I  martiya  -  imaima  na.ma  (H)uv^- 
jiya  a.vam  m^thisht^m  akun^v<3;(n)  pasa.va  a.dam  kar^m 
fraish^y^m  (H)uva]am  I  martiya  Gauharuva  nama 
Tdivsa  mana.  ha(^n)daka  av<^msham  m^thisht^m  akun^a:- 
v^m  passiva  hauv  Gauharuva  hada.  kara  ashiy^v^ 
(H)uv^j^m  hamaranam  akun^ush  h^da  h^mitriy^ibish 

pasa,va utash^iy    marda    uta ....  a.garha,ya    uta 

aniy^  abiy  mam d^hyaush ]anam  a.va- 

d^shim ....  2.  Thatiy  Dar<3:y<2v^(h)ush  khshay^- 
thiy^  a . .  .  uta  d^h . .  .  Aur^m^zda .  .  aya . .  .  v^shna 
Auramazdaha  . .  .thadish  akun^v<3:m.  3.  Thatiy  Da- 
Tayava(h)ush.  khshay^thiy<3:  hy^  aparam  imam  ya, .  . . 

.  .hrttiy  uta  jiv^hya 4.  Thatiy  Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush 

khshay^thiy^ ashiy^v^m  abiy  St^kam 

Tigram   b^r^ty<2 iy  abiy  d^r<^y^m  av^zm  .... 

...  .a  pisa  viyatara aj^n^m  aniy^m  agar- 

bay^^m abiy  mam  uta S<7ku(n)k^  nam^ 

av<^m  ag^rbay^m avada  aniy<3;m  m^thisht^m 

am  aha  pasava  da 5.  Thatiy  Dara- 

y<^v<3:(h)ush    khshay<^thiy<^ ma   n^iy   Aura- 

mazda y<3:diy  v<3:shna  Aur^m^zdah<3: 

akun<^v^m.      6.    Thatiy  Dar<^y<3;v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^ 

Aur^m^zdam   yadata uta  jiva- 

hya  uta . . 


72 

Smaller  Behistan  Inscriptions, 


OVER  THE  PICTURE  OF  DARIUS. 

Adam  Dsirayava(h)ush.  khshay<2thiy^  vazraka 
khshay^thiy<3;  khshay^thiyan^m  khsha.yathiya  Par- 
saiy  khshay^thiy<3:  d<3;hyunam  V(i)shtasp^hya  putr^ 
Arsham^hya  napa  H^kham^^nishiy^s;  Thatiy  Dar^ya- 
va(h)ush.  khshay^^thiy^  mana.  pita  V(i)shtasp^  V(i)sh- 
tasp<3:hya  pita  Arsham^  Arsham<3;hya  pita  Ariyar^mn^ 
Ariyar<a;mn^hya  pita  C^ishpish  C^ishp(3:ish  pita  H<3;kha- 
m^nish  Thatiy  Dar<3;y^v<3:(h)ush  khshay<3:thiy<3;  Sivahya^ 
radiy  vayam  H<3;kham<3:nishiya  th^hyam^hy  haca, 
p^ruviy^t<3:  amata  am^hy  haca,  paruviyata  hya  ama- 
kh^m  t^uma  khshay^thiya  aha(n)  Thatiy  Daraya- 
v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^a;  VIII  mana.  t^umaya  ty^iy 
p^ruv^m  khshay^thiya  ah<a:(n)  ad^m  navama  IX  duvi- 
tat^rn^m  vayam  khshay^thiya  am^hy 

b. 

UNDER  THE  PROSTRATE  FORM. 

lyam  Gaumata  hya  M<3;gush  adurujiy^  av<3^tha  ath^a;- 
ha  adam  B^rdiy^s;  amiy  hy^  Kur^ush  putr^  ad^m 
khshay^thiy^  amiy. 

c. 

OVER   THE    FIRST   UPRIGHT   FIGURE. 

ly^m  Atrin<2  adurujiy^  av^tha  a.thaha  a.dam  khsha- 
yathiya  amiy  (H)uv^j^iy. 

d. 

OVER  THE  SECOND  FIGURE. 

ly^m  N^dit^bir^  adurujiy^  av^tha  athaha  ad^m 
'Nahuk(u)dracara  amiy  hya  N^bunit^hy^  putr^  add;m 
khshayathiya  amiy  Babir^uv. 


73 


e. 

UPON    THE    LOWER   PART    OF   THE    ATTIRE    OF   THIRD    FIGURE. 

lyam  Fr^v<3:rtish  adurujiy^:  av^tha  a.thaha  d.dam 
Khsh<a;thrit<3;  amiy  (H)uvakhsha.yatarahya  t^xumaya 
ad^m  khshay^thiy^  amiy  Mad^iy. 

f. 

OVER   THE   FOURTH    FIGURE. 

lyam  M^rtiy<3:  adurujiy^a:  av^tha  a.th.aha  a.dam  Ima- 
nish  amiy  (H)uv^j^iy  khshay^thiy^. 

OVER   THE   FIFTH    FIGURE. 

Iy<^m  Citr^(n)t^khm<3:  adurujiy^  av^tha  athaha  adam 
khshay^thiy^  As^g^rt^iy  (H)uv^khsh^t^r^hy^  tau- 
maya. 

h. 

OVER   THE   SIXTH    FIGURE. 

lyam  Vahyazdata  adurujiy^  av^tha  athaha  a.dam 
B<3:rdiy^  amiy  hya  Kur<3;ush  putr^  ad<3:m  khshay^thiy^a 
amiy. 


OVER  THE  SEVENTH  FIGURE. 

ly^m  Arakha  adurujiy^  av^tha  athaha  adam  N^- 
buk(u)dr^c^r<3;  amiy  hya  N<3:bunit^hya  putr^  ad^m 
khshay^thiy^  amiy  Babir^uv. 

OVER   THE   EIGHTH    FIGURE. 

ly^m  Frad^  adurujiy^a:  sLvatha,  aihaha  adam  khsha- 
y^thiy^  amiy  M^rg<a:uv. 

k. 

OVER   THE   NINTH    FIGURE. 

ly^m  S<3!ku(n)k^  hya  Saka. 


74 


III. 


The  Inscription  of  Alvend.    (O.) 

"Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^zda  hya  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  divam  asman<3:m  ada  hya  martiyam  ada  hya  shiya- 
tim  ada  martiyahya,  hya  ^Da.rayava(h)um  khshay^- 
thiy<3:m  aivam  p^runam  fr<3;matar^m  Ad<3:m  Daraya- 
v<3:(h)ush  khshay<3:thiy^  vazraka  khshay^thiy<3;  khsha- 
y^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^a:  d<2;hyunam  p^ruz<^nanam 
khshayathiya  ahyaya  bumiya  v<a;zr^kaya  dur^iy  apiy 
Vishtasp^hya  putr^  H<2kham<a:nishiy^. 

^  Dar<zyava(b)um  kbshayatbiyam  akunaush,  64,  a. 


75 


IV. 

Inscriptions   of  Suez.     (SZ.) 


Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay<3;thiy^  vazvaka  khshay^- 
thiy^  khshay<3:thiyanam  khshay^thiy^  d^hyunam 
Vishtasp^hya   putm    H^kham^nishiy^. 


'Baga  vazvaka  A\iramazd3.  hya  avam  asman<3:m  ada 
hya  imam  bumim  ada  hya  martiyam  ada  hya  shiyatim 
ada  m^rtiy^hya  hya  Dar^y<3;v^(h)um  khshay^thiy<3:m 
akun^ush  hya  Darayavahaush  khshay^thiy^hya 
khsh<3:tr<3:m  irahara  tya  vazrakam  tya ....  Ad<3:m 
Dar<a:y<3;v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  vazvaka  khshay<3:thiy<2: 
khshay^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^  d<3:hyunam  pavuvza- 
nanam  khshay<3:thiy<3:  ahyaya  bumiya  vazvakaya.  du- 
raiy  apiy  Vishtasp^hya  putr^  H^kham^xnishiy^  Tha- 
tiy  Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3;  ad^^m  Tavsa  amiy 
h<3:da  Parsa  Mudray^m  ag^rbay^m  a.dam  niy^shtay<a;m 
imam  yuviyam  ka(n)taviaiy  haca.  ^Fiva,va  via.ma  vauta 
tya  Mudray^iy  d^n^uv^tiy  abiy  d^r^y^  tya  haca. 
Parsa   aitiy   pasdiva   iyam    yuviya    (akaniy)    av^(da) 

y^tha  ad^^m  niy<3:shtay^m  ut ay^ta  haca, . .  .  ya 

mam  yuviyam  abiy  pa ta  y<a:tha  ma 

*  Piravtf  namo  rauta,  68. 


76 


V. 


Inscription  of  London. 
Ad^m  Par^yav^(h)ush  khshay<3;thiy^. 


77 

Inscriptions  of  Persepolis. 
H. 

ABOVE  THE   WALL   SURROUNDING   THE   PALACE  OP   PERSEPOLIS. 

Aur<2m<2zda  vazxaVa  hya  maihishta  b^^ganam  h^uv 
Dar^y^v<2(h)um  khshay^thiy^m  ad^da  h^ush^iy 
khsh<2;tr<3:m  irahara  v^shna  Aur<3;m^zdaha  DsLvaya- 
v^(h)ush  khshay<2thiy(2;  Thatiy  Dar<3;y^v^(h)ush  khsha- 
yathiya  iyam  d^xhyaush  Pars<2  tyam  mana.  Aur^m^zda 
irabara  hya,  naiha  ([h]uv^spa)  (h)um^rtiya  v<2shna 
Aur^m(^zdaha  manaca,  Darayavahaush.  khshay<3;thiy^- 
hya  haca.  aniy^na  naiy  tarsatiy  Thatiy  Daraya- 
v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  mana  Aur^m^zda  up^stam 
haratuv  hada  vithibish  hagaibish  uta  imam  d<3:hyaum 
Aur<3:m<2zda  patuv  h<^ca  h<3:inaya  haca.  dushiyara  haca. 
dr<2uga  aniy<a:  imam  d<3;hyaum  ma. .  aj^miya  ma  h^ina 
ma  dushiyar<3:m  ma  drauga  a.ita  adam  yan  -  -  m 
j^diyamiy  Aur^m^zdam  h^da  'vithibish  b^gmbish 
ait^m<3!iy  Aur<2m^zda  d^datuv  h^da  vithibish  b^g^ibish. 

I. 

ANOTHER  INSCRIPTION   ABOVE  THE  WALL. 

Ad^m  Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  v^zr^k^ 
khshay^thiy<2  khshay^thiyanam  khshay<3:thiy<2  d<2hyu- 
nam  ty<3:isham  p<3;runam  Vishtasp<2hya  putr^  H^kha- 
m^nishiya  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^ 
v^shna  Aur^m^zdaha  ima  d^hyav^  tya  ad^m  ad^r- 
sh^iyh^da  ana  Parsa  kara  tya  hacama  at^rs<2(n)  m^na 
bajim  a.hara(n)  (H)uv^j^  Mad<3;  Babirush  Arahaya 
Athura  Mudraya  Arming  K<2t^p«tuk^  Sp^rd^a;  Y^una 
ty<a:iy  (h)ushk<2hya  uta  tya'iy  darayahya.  uta  dahyava 
tya  p^r^uvi^iy  As^g^^rt^  Varthava  ZaTa(n)ka  Haraiva 
Bakhtrish  Sugd<2:  (H)uvar^z<3;miy^  Th(3:t<3:gush  Harau- 
v<2tish  Hi(n)dush  G^(n)dar^  S^ka  Maka  Thatiy  Dar^- 
y<2;v^(h)ush    khshay^thiy^    y^diy    av<2tha    m^niyahy 

1  vithibish  b^goibish,  86,  a 


78 

^hacsi  aniyana.  ma  tarsam  im^m  Pars<3;m  kar^^m  padiy 
yadiy  ka.ra  Farsa  pa.ta  ah^'tiy  hya  duv^^isht^m  shiya- 
tish  akhsh^ta  h^uvciy  Aura  nir^satiy  abiy  imam 
vitham. 

B. 

OVER   THE   PILLARS   IN   THE   PALACE. 

Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  vazraka  khshay^- 
thiya  khshay<3:thiyanam  khshay<3:thiy<3!  d<2;hyunam 
Vishtap^hya  putr^  .  Hakham<a:nishiy^  hya  im^m  taca- 
ram  akun^ush. 

1  haca  aniyana  ma  tarsam,  11,  a;  95,  b. 


79 

Inscriptions  of  Naqshi  Rustam.     (NR) 

a. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^^zda  hya  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  a.vam  asman«^m  ada  hya  martiyam  ada  hya  shiya- 
tim-  ada  martiyahya,  hya  Dar^y^v<2(h)um  khshay^- 
thiy<3:m  akun<2ush  aiv^m  p^ruvnam  khshay<2:thiy<2m 
aiv<3:m  p^ruvnam  fr^mat^r^m  Ad^m  Dar<3'y^v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy^  vazraka  khshay^thiy^  khshay^thiyanam 
khshay^thiy^  d<2hyunam  visp^z^nanam  khshay^thiy^ 
ahyaya  bumiya  vazakaya,  dur^iy  apiy  Vishtasp^^ihya 
putr^  H«kham<3:nishiy^  Pars^  Tavsahya,  putra  Ariya 
Ariya  citr^  Thatiy  Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush  khshay<3:thiy^ 
v^shna  Aur^im^zdaha  ima  dahya.va  tya  ad^m  a.gar- 
bay^m  ^ap^t^r^^m  haca,  Parsa  *ad^msham  patiya- 
khsh^iy  m^^na  bajim  ab^r^(n)t(a)  ty^sham  h^cam<a: 
ath^hy  a.va  akunava(n)  dat^m  tya  mana,  a.\ta  adari 
Mad^  (H)uvrtj^  Vavthava  Haraiva  Bakhtrish  Sugud<3: 
(H)uvar^z<3:mish  Zara(n)ka  H^xr^uv^tish  Th^t^gush 
G<3:(n)dar<a;  Hi(n)dush  S<3;ka  Humavarka,  Saka.  Tigr^- 
kh^uda  Babirush  Athura  Ar^bay<3J  Mudraya  Armin<a: 
K.atapatuka  Sparda  ^Yauna  Saka,  ty^iy  t^r^d^r^y^ 
Skudr^  Y^una  Takahara,  Putiya  Kushiya  M^ciya 
K<3:rka    Thatiy    Darayava(h)ush   khshay«thiy<^  Aura- 

vaazda.  yatha.  a.vaina  imam   bumim  yu p^sav^- 

dim  m^na  irahara  mam  khshay^thiy^m  akun^ush 
ad^m  khshay<3:thiy^  amiy  v<^shna  Aur«m«zdaha  ad^m- 
shim  gathva  niyrt:shad<^y<a:m  "^tyt-zsham  ad^m  ath^h^m 
3iva  akun<2:v«(n)ta  y<3:tha  mam  kam«  ah^  y<2diy^diy  ty^ 
5ciy^(n)k^mm  ava  dahyava  tya,  Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
khshay^thiy^  adavaya  p^tik^r^m  didiy  tyaiy  ma- 
na  gathum  b<2r<3:(n)tiy  y^^tha  ^khshnasah^dish  ad<3;- 
t^iy  azda  b^vatiy  Pars^hya  martiyahya  dur^y  arsh- 
tish  p^ragm<2ta  adata\y  azda  b<2vatiy  Pars^  mfl^rtiy^ 

*  apatar^m  haca  Parsa,  78.  *  adamsham  potiyakhshaiy,  83,  b. 
^Yauna,  86,  b,  Note  1.  ■*  tyarsham  -  akunava(n)ta,  60,  A.  •ciya{nj- 
}s.axam  ava  dahyava,  86.     *  khsbaasabadisb,  83,  B. 


8o 

duray  hacz  Parsa  hamaram  patlya]ata  Thatiy  Dara- 
y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy<3:  aita  tya  kartam  ava  vis^m 
v^shna  Aur^m<2zdaha  akun^v^m  Auramazd3.maiy 
up^stam  ahara  yata  kartam  akunavam.  mam  Aura- 

m^zda  patuv  haca,  sar utam^iy  vith<3:m  uta  imam 

d<3:hyaum  'aita  adam  Aur^m<2zdam  j<3;diyamiy  aita- 
maiy  Aur<3:m^zda  d^datuv  M<2:rtiya  hya  Aur^m^^zdaha 
fmmana  h^uvt^iy  g^sta  ma  thadaya  p^thim  tyam  ras- 
tam  ma  avarada  ma  starava, 

b. 
Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^zda  hya  aca f 

-  -  m  tya  va ada  shiyatim   m<:2:rtiy^hya 

-  -  u  -  -  -  a   aruv^st<3:m  up^riy  Dar<3:y^v<3:(h)um  khsha- 

y<3:thiy<3:m iyasaya  Thatiy  Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khsha- 

yjzthiya    v^shna    Aumm<^zdaha kar 

iy<3;  tya a tarn ya d^ush 

athiy  n sh uva ya 

yim  k^rimish v^sim  tya 

r iya im riyish 

ava  -  -  m m     m m     dar  ------ 

ush a uvish  a miy 

ya astiy  darshama  da ya au 

iyahya  darshama 

c. 

Gauharuva  Patishuv<3:rish  Darayavahaush  khshay^- 
thiy^hya  sharastihara. 

d. 

Asp<2C^na  Darayavahaush  khshay^thiy^hya  isuvam 
dasy^ma. 


ly^m  M^ciya. 

1  a\ta  adam  Auramflzdam  jadiyamiy,  64. 


VI. 


THE    INSCRIPTIONS    OF    XERXES. 
The  Inscriptions  of  Persepolis. 

UPON  EACH  ONE  OF  THE  FOUR  PILLARS  OF  THE  ENTRANCES  TO  THE 
PALACE  OF  XERXES. 

Baga  vazvaka  Aur^m^zda  hya  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  m^rtiy^m  ada  hya  shiyatim  ada  m^rtiy^hya  hya 
Khsh<^yarsham  khshay^thiy^^m  akun<a;ush  aiv^m  p^ru- 
nam  iramRtRvam  Ad<^m  Khsh(^yarsha  khshay^^thiy^a: 
vazraka  khshay<^thiy^  khshay^^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^a; 
d^hyunam  p<2:ruvz<?nanam  khshay^thiy^  ahyaya  bu- 
miya  vrt:zr^kaya  dur<^iy  apiy  Dar^^y^v^^h^ush  khshay^- 
thiy(^hya  putr^  H(^kham<^nishiy(3:  Thatiy  Khsh^iyarsha 
khshayrtthiy<^  v^zr^k^  v^shna  Aurt^m^zdaha  im^m 
duv(^rthim  vis^d^hyum  ad^^m  akun<^v^m  v^siy  ani- 
y^shciy  n^ib^m  k^rt^m  ^ana  Parsa  tya  ad^^m  akun^^;- 
v^m  utamaiy  tya  pita  akun^^ush  ty<7p<^tiy  kartam 
vainataiy  n^^ib^^m  a.va  vis^^m  v<^shna  Aumm^zdaha 
akuma  Thatiy  Khsh^yarsha  khshayf^thiy^:?  mam  Aur^- 
m^zda  patuv  utamaiy  khsh«tr<^m  uta  ty^  m^na  kar- 
tam uta  ty^m^iy  pitri  k^rt^m  av^^shciy  Aur^m^zda 
patuv. 


UPON   THE   PILLARS   ON   THE   WESTERN    SIDE   OF   THE   PALACE. 

Khsh^^yarsha  khshay^thiy^  v^zr^^k^  khshay<^thiy^ 
khshayrt;thiyanam  Damyrtv^h^ush  khshay<^thiy^hya 
putr<^  H<^kham(^nishiy^. 

1  ana  Parsa,  73. 


82 

Ea. 

UPON    THE   WALL   BY  THE   STEPS   OF   THE   PALACE. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur<7m<2zda  hya  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  av^m  asman^m  ada  hya  martlyam  ada  hya  shiya- 
tim  ada  martiyahyd,  hya  Khsh<3:yarsham  khshay^- 
thiy^m  akun^^ush  aiv^m  p^runam  khshay^thiy^m 
3.ivam  prt:runam  fr<3;matar^m  Adam  Khsh^^yarsh^ 
khshay<3;thiy^  vazraka  khshay<3:thiy<^  khshay<2thiyanam 
khshay<2thiy^  d^hyunam  p^ruvz^nanam  khshay^thiy^ 
ahiyaya  bumiya  v<3;zr^kaya  dur<^iy  SipiyDsLvayavahaush 
khshay<2thiy<3:hya  putr^  Hrt;kham^nishiy<3:  Thatiy 
Khshi^yarsha  khshay^thiy<3:  vazraka  v^^shna  Auramaz- 
daha  ima  h^dish  adrt;m  akunavam  mam  Aur<2m«zda 
patuv  h^da  b<3:g^ibish  utamaiy  khsh<3:tr^m  uta  ty^m^iy 
k^rt^m. 

Eb. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^zda  hya  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  a.vam  asman^^m  ada  hya  m^rtiy<3:m  ada  hya  shlya- 
tim  ada  m^rtiy<3:hya  hya  Khsh^yarsham  khshay^thi- 
y^m  akun^ush  aiv<3:m  p^runam  khshay<3:thiy^m  aiv^m 
p^runam  fr^matar^m  Ad«m  Khsh<3:yarsha  khshay^j- 
thiy^  vazraka  khshay^thiy^  khshay^thiyanam  khsha- 
yathiya  d(3:hyunam  p^ruvz^nanam  khshay^thiy^ 
ahiyaya  bumiya  v^zr^kaya  dur^iy  apiy  Darayava- 
h^ush  khshay<2thiy^hya  putr^  H-^kham^nishiy^  Thatiy 
Khsh^yarsha  khshay<^thiy<3;  vazraka  v^shna  Aur^m^z- 
dah^  im^  h^dish  ad<^m  akun^v^m  mam  Aur^m^zda 
patuv  h^da  b^g^ibish  ut^m^iy  khsh^tr^m  uta  tyam^iy 
k^rt^m. 

Ca. 

UPON   THE   HIGHEST   PILLAR   NEAR   THE   SOUTHERN    STEPS. 

"Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^zda  hy^  imam  bumim  ada 
hy^  av^m  asman^m  ada  hy^  m^rtiy^m  ada  shiyatim 
ada   m^rtiy^hya  hy^   Khsh^yarsham  khshayizthiy^m 


83 

akun^ush  aiv^m  p^runam  khshay^thiy^m  aiv^m 
p^runam  iramat3.vam  Ad^m  Khsh(2yarsha  khshay^- 
thiya  vazraka  khshay<^thiy^  khshay^thiyanam  khsha- 
yathiya  d^hyunam  'p<^ruv  z^nanam  khshay^thiy^ 
ahyaya  bumiya  v<^zr^kaya  dur^^iy  apiy  "Da-rayavahaush 
khshay<3:thiy<3:hya  putr^  H(a:kham^nishiy^  Thatiy 
Khsh(^yarsha  khshay^thiy^  v^zr^k^  v^shna  Aur^hy^ 
Mazd^ha  ima  h^^dish  D 2.r ay av a (h)ush.  khshay^thiy^ 
akun<7ush  hya  mana.  pita  mam  Aur<2m^zda  patuv  h^da 
b^g^ibish  uta  ty«mrt:iy  k^rt^m  uta  tyama'iy  pitr<2  Da- 
r^y<^vrth^ush  khshay^thiyrt:hya  kartam  av^shciy  Aura- 
m^zda  patuv  h^^da  b^g^zibish. 

Cb. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur^^m^izda  hy^  imam  bumim  ada 
hya  av^m  asman^^m  ada  hya  m^rtiy^m  ada  hya  shiya- 
tim  ada  m^rtiy<7;hya  hy<3!  Khsh^yarsham  khshay^- 
thiy<^m  akun<^ush  aiv<?m  p^runam  khshay^thiy^m 
aivam  p^runam  fmmatamm  Ad^m  Khsh^-yarsha 
khshay(^thiy<2  vazraka  khshay^thiy^  khshay^thiyanam 
khshay^^thiy^  d^hyunam  'p^ruv  z^nanam  khshay^- 
thiy^  ahyaya  bumiya  v^zr^kaya  dur^^iy  apiy  Da.raya- 
v^hrtush  khshay^thiy^aihya  putr^  H<a:kham^nishiy(3: 
Thatiy  Khsh^^yarsha  khshay^thiy^  v^zr^k^  v^shna 
Aur^hy^  M^zdah^  im^  h^^dish  T)a.rayava(h)ush  khsha- 
yathiya  akun^^ush  hya  mana,  pita  mam  Aur^m^zda 
patuv  h^da  b^^g^ibish  uta  ty<7m<^iy  k^rt^m  uta  ty^- 
maiy  pitr^  Dar<^y<^v^h<7ush  khshay<^thiy^hya  k^rt^m 
av^shciy  Aumm^zda  patuv  h<2da  b^g^ibish. 

A. 

UPON  THE  STEPS  OF  THE  PALACE. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur<7m<7zda  hy^  imam  bumim  ada 
av^m  asman^m  ada  hy^  m^rtiy^m  ada  hy^  shiyatim 
ada   m«rtiy<?hya  hy^   Khsh<^yarsham   khshay^thiy^m 

^  paruv  zananam,  104,  Note. 


84 

akun^ush  aiv^m  p<3:runam  khshay^thiy^m  aiv<3:m  p^ru- 
nam  fr^^matamm  Ad^m  Khsh<^yarsha  khshay^thiy^ 
vazxaVa  khshay<^thiy<3;  khshay^^thiyanam  khshay<7thiy(3: 
d<2hyunam  p^ruvz^nanam  khshay^thiy<^  ahiyaya  bu- 
miya  v^zr<2kaya  ^wxa'iy  apiy  Dar(2y<^v<^h<2ush  khshay^s:- 
thiy^^hya  putr<3;  Hakham<^nishiy<^  Thatiy  Khsh^yarsha 
khshay^thiy<2:  v^'zr^k^j;  \.ya  m<^na  k^rt^^m  ida  uta  X.ya- 
mrt-iy  apataram  kartam  a.va  vis^m  v^^shna  Auramaz- 
daha  akun^v^m  mam  Aur^m^zda  patuv  h^da  bagai- 
bish  utam<2iy  khsh^tr^m  uta  tyamaiy  kartam. 


8s 


Inscription    of  Alvend. 
F. 

B^^^^  vazxaka  Aur^m^zda  Yiya  m^thisht^  b^ganam 
'\\ya  imam  bumim  ada  \iya  av^m  asman^m  ada  \iya 
m^rtiy^m  ada  \iya  shiyatim  ada  m^rtiy^hya  hy<2: 
Khsh^yarsham  khshay^thiy^m  akun^ush  aiv<^m  p^ru- 
nam  khshay<2thiy<3:m  aiv^^m  p^runam  fr^matan^m 
Ad^m  Khsh^yarsha  khshay^thiy*^;  vazxaVa  khshay^- 
thiya  khshay^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^x  d<3:hyunam 
p^ruz<2nanam  khshay<a:thiy^  ahiyaya  bumiya  vazxa- 
kaya  dur^iy  apiy  Dar^y^v^h^ush  khshay^thiya  hya 
putr^  H^kham^nishiy^. 


S6 


Inscription  of  Van. 

K. 

"Baga  vazraka  Aur(3:m<7zda  hya  m<^thlst^  haganam 
hya  imam  bumim  ada.hy<a;  av<a;m  asman^m  ada  hya 
m^rt'iyavn  ada  hya  shiyatim  ada  m^rtiy^hya  hya 
Khsh^yarsham  khshay^thiytxm  akun^ush  aiv^m  p^ru- 
nam  khshay^thiy^m  aiv^m  p^^runam  tematar^m 
Ad^m  Khsh^yarsha  khshay^thiy^^;  vazvaka  khshay<3:- 
thiya  khshay^thiyanam  khshay<^thiy^  d^^hyunam  ^pa- 
ruv  z^nanam  khshay^thiy^  ahyaya  bumiya  v<3:zr^kaya 
dur<^iy  apiy  'Da.rayavahaush  khshay<3;thiy<?hya  putr^ 
H«kham<2nishiy^  Thatiy  Khsh^yarsha  khshay^thiy^ 
Dar^y^v^(h)ush  khshay^thiy^  hya  m^na  pita  hauv 
v^shna  Aur^m<^zdaha  v^siy  ty^  n^ib^m  akun^ush  uta 
ima  stan^m  hauv  niy^^shtay^^  k^(n)t^nmy  yanaiy 
dipim  n^iy  nipishtam  akun^ush  pasava  ad^m  niy^sh- 
tay<3;m  imam  dipim  nipisht<?n«iy  (Mam  Aur^^m^zda 
patuv  hada,  b^g^ibish  utam^iy  khsh^tr^m  uta  tyamaiy 
k^rt<a:m). 

Qa. 

UPON   THE   VASE   OF   COUNT   CAYLUS. 

Klish^yarsha  khshay^thiy^  vazraka. 
^  paruv  zananam,  104,  Note. 


87 


VII. 

INSCRIPTIONS  OF  PERSIAN  KINGS 

AFTBR 

XERXKS. 


ARTAXERXES  I. 

Inscription   at  Venice. 
Qb. 

UPON   THE   VASE    IN    THE   TREASURY   OF   ST,   MARKS. 

Ard«khc^shc<3;  khshay<^thiy^  Yuzvaka. 


88 


DARIUS  II. 

Inscriptions  of  Persepolis. 
L. 

ABOVE   THE    POSTS    OF   THE   WINDOWS    IN    THE    PALACE    OF    DARIUS 
HYSTASPES. 

Ard^stan^   3.iha(n)gama   Da.r ay avahaush  khshay^- 
thiyahya.  vithiya  karta. 


89 
ARTAXERXES    MNEMON.* 

Inscriptions  of  Susa.     (S.) 
a. 

UPON   THE   BASE   OF   THE   PILLARS   OF   A   SMALL   ROW  OF   COLUMNS. 

Ad^m  Art«khsh<^tra  khshsiyathiya  wazxaVa  khsha- 
ya'Osxiya  khshay<a:thiyanam  'Dar<3;y^v<3:(h)ush<3:hyakhsha- 
y^thiy^hya  putr<3;. 

b. 

UPON   THE   BASE   OF  THE   PILLARS    IN   THE    LARGE   ROW  OF   COLUMNS. 

Thatiy  Atr^^khsh^tra  khshay<3;thiy^  vazxaVa  khsha- 
y^thiy^  khshay^thiyanam  khshay^thiy^  d^hyunam 
khshay^thiy^a;    ahyaya    bumiya    Dar^y^v^(h)ush^hya 

1  Darayrtva(h)ushahya,  85,  a;  24. 

*  An  ingenious  attempt  to  make  syntax  out  of  the  loose  construction 
shown  in  these  inscriptions  of  Artaxerxes  Mnemon  and  Artaxerxes 
Ochus,  is  the  following: 

Darfl'yav«(h)ush  Vishtasp^hya  nama  putra  "D.  sohn  eines  mit  na- 
men  V."  Das  folgende  jedoch  Vishtaspahya  Arsham^^  nama  putra 
zeigt  wie  die  vorhergehende  genealogische  aufzahlung  eine  anakoluthe 
verbindung  zweier  nominative,  von  denen  der  eine  zum  andern  im 
genetivverhaltnis  steht.  So  merkwiirdig  das  anakoluth  in  P) 
ist,  so  wird  es  doch  durch  ein  analogon  gestiitzt:  es  entspricht 
genau  der  construction  Sz  b)  h^ca  Pirava  nama  xavXa.  In  bei- 
den  fallen  ist  statt  eines  obliquen  casus  der  nominativ  gesetzt 
in  folge  einer  art  verkiirzung  einer  bei  den  alten  Persern  haufigen 
pleonastischen  ausdruckweise;  wie  h<7ca  —  Pirav^  nama  rayxia  voll- 
standig  lauten  miisste  hrt-ca  r^-uta  —  Piravii:  nam^:  xawia  —  hr/ca  ada, 
ebenso  an  unserer  stelle  m^'rtiyrthya  —  Arshamfl;  nam^  mfl-rtiya  —  av«- 
hya  putr^.  Eine  solche  lose  anreihung  zweier  in  abhangigkeitsver- 
haltnis  zu  denkender  glieder  ist  etwas  ganz  gewohnliches,  z.  b.  Nisaya 
namrt  d<7hy<7ush  —  av^d^shim  avaj'rn^m  (Bh.  I),  (V^rumisa)  nam^ 
Pars«  b«(n)d«ka  av<zm  ad^ra  fraish^ya'm  (II).  Diese  construc- 
tionen  unterscheiden  sich  von  der  unsrigen  nur  dadurch,  dass  die 
wiederaufnahme  des  abhangigen  satzgliedes  durch  eine  oblique  pro- 
nominalform  sowohl  Sz  b)  wie  an  unserer  stelle  nicht  stattgefunden 
hat.  Es  ist  eine  jedermann  verstandliche  vercinfachung  jener  um- 
standlichen  und  schwerfallinen  ausdrucksweise. 

In  P)  ist  auch  das  wort  nam^,  welches  urspriinglich  die  be- 
dingung  der  anakoluthen  construction  ist,  als  entbehrlich  iiber  bord 
geworfen:  ArtokhshrttraDarayavrt(h)ush  khshayathiy^  putra  ist  also  die 


90 

khshay^thly^hya  putr^  Dar^y^v^(h)ush^hya  Art^- 
khsh^trahya  khshayathiy^hya  putr^  Art«khsh<3:trahya 
Khsh^yarsh<a:hya  khshay^thiy^hya  putr<3:  Khsh^yar- 
sh^hya  Dar<2y^v^(h)ush^hya  khshay^thiy<3:hya  putr<3: 
Dar<a:y^v^(h)ush«hya  Vishtashp^hya  putr<3;  Hakha.ma- 
nishiy^  ^Imam  a.pad2ina  Da.rayava(h.)ush.  ap^nyak<3:m<3f 
■akuiK^sh  ahiyapara . .  .  .pa  Art^khsh^tra  nyak^m<3;.  . . 
Anahata  uta  Mithr*^  vashnsL  Auramazdsha  ap^dana 
a.dam  akunavam  Aur^m^zda  Anahata  uta  Mithr<3r 
mam  patuv  .  . . 

weiterentwicklung  und  vereinfachung  des  Slteren  typus  Artakhsha- 
tra  khshay«thiyrthya  —  Dar«yavrt!{h)ush  nam«  khshay^thiyrt: — avahya 
putr«  '  'A.  sohn  eines  konigs  —  es  ist  ein  konig  Darius  mit  namen  — 
dessen  sohn." 

Noch  eine  andere  eigenheit  enthalt  die  inschrift,  nSralich  den  gen- 
etiv  Vishtapahya,  wo  wir  einen  nominativ  erwarten.  Dieselbe 
construction  findet  sich  durchgangig  in  S.  Die  wiederholung 
des  namens  im  genetiv  statt  im  nominativ  dient  zu  emphatischer  her- 
vorhebung  und  ist  eine  assimilatorische  anlehnung  an  den  vorher- 
gehenden  genetiv,  wahrend  das  subjekt  aus  dem  genetiv  zu  erganzen  ist: 
Darayava(h)ushahya  khshay^thiy^hya  putr^,  Dar^v^y^z(h)ushahya 
(hy«)  Artokhshatr^hya  putr«  "des  Darius  sohn,  (jenes)  Darius,  (der) 
des  Artaxerxes  sohn  (war),  jenes  Artaxerxes,  der  des  Xerxes  sohn 
war  u.  s.  w. — 

1  Imam  apfldada,  85,  b.     'akuntzsh,  43. 


91 


ARTAXERXES    OCHUS. 

Inscription  of  Persepolis. 
P. 

UPON   THE   STEPS   OF  THE   PALACE   OF   DARIUS    HYSTASPES    AND    ARTA- 
XERXES   OCHUS. 

Baga  vazraka  Aur^m^zda  hya  imam  bumam  ada 
hya  avam  asmanam  ada  hya  m<^rtiy^m  ada  hya  shay^- 
tam  ada  m<3:rtihya  hya  mam  Art<2khsh<^tra  khshay^- 
thiya  akun^ush  aiv^m  paruvna.Tn  khshay^thiy^m 
aivam  p^^ruvnam  iramataram  Thatiy  Artrt:khsh<2tra 
khshay<3:thiy«  vazraka  khshayathiya  khshay<^thiyanam 
khshay^thiy<^  d^^hyunam  khshay^^thiy^a:  ahyaya  bumiya 
Adam  Artakhsh<^tra  khshay^^thiy^a:  putr<3;  Art<3;khsh^tra 
D ar ay av a (h)ush  khshay^^thiy^  putra  Art<3:khsh(a:tra 
khshay<^thiy<^  putr<^  Art^khsh<3:tra  Khsh^yarsha  khsha- 
yathiya putr<3;  Khsh^yarshaDar<3;y«v^(h)ush  V(i)shtas- 
p<a:hya  nam^  putr^  V(i)shtasp<^hya  Arsham<3:  nam<3: 
putra  H<2kham(3:nishiyrt;  Thatiy  Art<2:khsh<3;tra  khshay*^:- 
thiy<a:  im<^m  us«t<3;sh^nam  'ath«(n)g«nam  mam  upa 
mam  k<3;rta  Thatiy  Art^khsh^tra  khshayathiya  mam 
Aur^m<3:zda  uta  M(i)thr<3;  haga  patuv  uta  imam  d<3;h- 
yum  uta  ^ty^  mam  k^rta. 

1  'D3iTayava(h)ush,  85,  c.     ^  atha(n)g^mam,  85,  d;  86,  d.    ^  tya  mam 
k^rta,  85,  e  and  f. 


ARSACES. 
R. 

INSCRIPTION    UPON    THE   SEAL   OF   GROTEFEND. 

Arsh<3:k^  nama  Athiyad^ush^n^hya  putr^. 


THK 


CUNEIFORM  TEXT 


OF  th:^ 

INSCRIPTIONS  OF  DARIUS 

AT 

ALVEND,  SUEZ,  PERSEPOEIS 

AND 

NAQSHI  RUSTAM. 


*The  inscriptions  are  taken  from  a  pen  sketch  made  by  the  author. 

For  the  Cuneiform  text  of  the  Behistan  the  student  is  referred  to 
the  great  work  of  Rawlinson  in  Vol.  X  of  the  Royal  Asiatic  Society 
of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.  The  author  is  under  much  obligation 
to  Dr.  Kossowicz,  Professor  of  Sanskrit  in  the  Imperial  University  of 
St.  Petersburg. 


/,,«K.9!»Af-JVr/f>' 


THE   TOMB    OF   DARIUS. 


The 
Cuneiform  kiVHA  BET. 


fGvrTumi  fn  A 

Jtautal  11  I  Sonant  Sibiunj  h^l  z 


I  i 


GuTT(;KM_  yt  K  ((Y  BEFORE  U)    «TI  KH'     <TK(<£^B£r^7?E  v) 

>^\A/  («^  BEFORE  U) 

■p4L/iTAL  y<>- 1:. 

LmGUAL^lK    ("-({mroKBU)  AsVlRATlOH   (^^{ 

DE/vr>iL  T£5 

NUMERALS 
h      Vr^        <T//     <?^^     H- 

£TC.  ^TC. 

A  WEDGR   SLOPING   OBLIQUELY    SEPARATES   EACH  WORD. 


'•.'"^:#'  -^? 


0) 


>M^T5m ft r<»m  \  mrrnr \ <k h- \  r<\\  t<> nr 

jlrl  ff  -m  ^  trr  fr  rr  'I  -TtI ^T  5 TTI  ^^  /<- <M  T<>  Yn\«<T<>\ 

^^  ^Yt  £^r  r<»  T£  (rr-m  \  «n  ?<  rrr  r<'  t<t  ft  r<»Mim<r<rr 

'Mffr  5TtT  m  ^r>Irn. 

KT ff  T<> vmT»T^YY$  ^  «Yy^  rrr  r<>  kty?  r<^ x«ymn? 
T<'T<r n  r<>  rrr  Mm' nr  \  «Tr  n m  r<> r<r r7  r<> "( n <?<  T<><fr 

-  r<>  1  m  <>^<  T<>  nr  r<>  JtV  t  ^r  <ff  T<?  rf  r<>  rTr  X  '-feT^'r 


(SL) 


a^ 


<HK>ml<'m  \  jT<rTr<Jnr<>frr  ~t  >r&M^rrstrr 

<^<UA  ffr>rH>M1  fyr  r£>rrrm5<'rrr  X    mfy  yfr^ 
^><r<>T  ff>TrT  m>rrnir<rr  K^frM-^mnm^  <J<r<>^ 

>rri^rjrrrffr<»M\  mtrm  ^  <kt<>  \  t<ff  r<>  ^r 
K<&^r8r^r\jwr<>vr^r»y^rrj>rYr\»wr<>  v 

i.  ^  rr>rrr  1  fr  ffr^E  rr<»m  <n  U  ^  i<K  \  i<l< ^r 
H  m > M 1  KK 1  Tr  <K  T<>  <r^  K  m  >  M  T  ^  > «  <rr>  ter» ) 
HrnHWr>m\HlC\  ni<H1<^mr<>  rrr  \  ^r<fr  m  ff 

Krr  r(>  m  « *  irT  m  R»rrr  \  n>m  m  >  W  ^  r<><rr5^  r7 
r<>  m  -M  \  r-'  rrr  k  ff  t<>  i  <j<  ^>  fr,  i  ^  f?  ^  r  jp,.^i 
*<  m  >rrT  "I  fer  <?r  5  w  1 J  yrr  r<>  \  ^<>  (rrn  ^m  mu^ 


>m^ff  T<"Trr \ T<> <rr riff y<>frr X  ft>ri5  \T<>r<r?rr'< 

iM  m  UK  fr>  ?rr  1     K>  Tfi  ^    ' hi  m  > m  X  r<>  <?r>rs  t? 

tfi  fr.'M  \  ff  fWEii<»rs<tie<\i<T<i 

;.  m  <fr  Sl>yrrr»Trr  m  \  >]'^l»]^1Y>  \  c><  r<> X 

r£ r<»r£<?r> rry\  «/! s  m  r<> r<r i^ i<»iii \ mrrrr nA 
<^<<rrSrfr<>\«ry^f?>MU«£r?njr^r\>r£r5Km\ 
W  <rr  £r>yry  y»y ri  m  <»<  m  t  f?  m  sr  y<»  r& <ry  ?<  \ 
«rrr<fYry<>y<yfrr<>\ 

4  y<y  ?rr  jw  ff  y<>  i  f?  m  £yy<»r^<n?<  ^  «yy  r<  frr 

1<>K1iiH>\HU»h1 1  ??<Ky<>m  <rrr<  \%n't^llB\ 

ilriK'ni'M  \  >iiU<vi  \  m<?T  £r>y»yy»yrT  m  \ 
<rr>yry^y?rTyyf  y<>  'm\>i^ro<m\ifiin^My'ir»ifim 
«yrs^ry<>y<yffy<><Ky<>rTr  i  <K?r>m  '\?ryKffr<> 

KmU<ffy<>\?yrr^y7£>'Trrr?K'\ 

5.  y<y  trr  ?m  n  y<>  Ur  m  £yy<» y e <^  ^  i  «yy^?rr 
y<>y<rny<>i  >yrrKmi  ^i<^^i>hu»inm\^n 
i^^m-m  \  5r^ryrr'<fr>yfci  kkyiWi  i  j^ffKr  ff 
nn'^1  >>r<rrfrjyff<<Ufr'yir?rr^n>yirm>rrr  \  w 


U.VX'/ERSITT 


<?<rY>rri  <i<  ?h<  ?rr  y<>fry  1  <><rr'm\<^i^rr<m<>m 

'M  rfr  -rrT  '\  Tr  <K  r<>  nr  <fr>/Tr  1  -Trr  frr  X  rr'  KKj  ff 

r<>  rr  ^  -Trr  m  ^  <><  ??  k  m  \  'M  m  \  <^y  <?f ^  n  r<>  m 

T<>  mK  'M  \  >r(^Tr  ff  r<'  ffr  Kn'fT<>  t  m<fr  ST>  TrT 

r>'r  rr  ffr>Trn<Kr'i  m  \  ft  ff  T<r  ff  J  Tff  ^  1  '>r<rrn  ^r  ff  ?<  t 

fn  f f ' lit  > TrT  f f  r <'  \  frt  <fr  fc r  >ri1 1»  r ff  fn  l     fr  n  fn 

rrT><fi>y£UKfrm'\ftffy<Tff>'m^vr<ry'fiJTff^A. 
r<rff  K>vr£T'>r£Tr5\«rrs  fn  T<>Krffr<>  \  «rr^  m 

K>  K1  fr  T<>  fn  K  ffrM  A «/Tr<  Tn  T<>  T<T  ff  K>  1  f?4< T<><f? 

Krfr'Mi  »rrrK'ffsm'M"i  ^>«<rrKm>rrri  f^ff 

?<?Trr  rTy  T£  ^<K  r<>  rTr  1    ^<ff  ^  A  <5<«Tr  m>  mK  ff 

i  KT  ffr  im  ff  r<>  ^  ff  ffr  ST  T<»T^<rrr<  A  «Tr^  m 
K'KTff  T<>  \  ']^V<  ?<  fn  \  ffr  (ff^l'hl  '{^'In  rTr<>'<  m 
ff'M fn  1  ff<J(K>  rYr>rS  \  -M  K>ni  \  fii  ff'W  1  frf  ff 
^r^  ff  K'\  <><rr  ffr  \  ffr  K  m  \  fr  ffr  ^r  T£  fn  A  n  W 
^tffi  \  MK'ffr  XKKf-rrTr'HA frr JMSTT  £  "<  >  TrT 
KrTr  \  ?r  fft  K^  if>Jrr\  ffr  ^T^T  "\  <rr>T£>y<X  -m  ffi  n  "^ 
K  rn  ? r  ff ' «  <fr  U 1  ffr  ^r q  rfr  T<>  \  fft  T<r <ff  ^  T  m^<><rr 
ff  ^I  rr  T<>  ffr  \  ffr  &  r  T  <>  ff  K  1  r?  j  W  mrPin  n  \  rs  ^■ 
srff  \T<><rr  ><  rYr\  sW  K-ff  K'  X  (rf  ^  KKK'  w  \  <ff 
''hi  rn  \  ilrl  K'  rf  K-  \  v  ^n<><KK>  m  \  (irfW  frr  \ 


Off   T*«         


>Tm  «rr  rr  n  n  "\  m  <rr  urn  a  <rr>  rs  frr^rr'-irK^  n  k>\ 
T<r>  Trr  <'^'<rr^\<i'<'^i  <rr>  i^^m  n  t<.  \  <*<  n  <£  r  w^  \ 

3.    KT  m  5  M  rf  r<'  \  fr  m £ T T<> '  i^<ry ^ X  «rr^rr 

Y<'T<Tffr<>  X     K>^riffT<>  \   frr>r^r<rfrr  X  'TrTKf? 
K>  m  <K  r<>  \  <K  rr>  nr  \  m  K  ff  K-  '><  nf  \  'B  rfr  \  m 

r.  ffr 'W  ^  m  <K>rrr  yf  r<>  \  <k k> m  \  <^r<rr>T£ rr 
^  'Ttt  'Trr  1  t^  ff  K>  m J  w  ff ^  \  ffr  «n s  5  rrr  m  \ 

nj  ilri  K>  \ fr'TrJ  rTr-TrrX  i^  rlKl>  M  \. 


(B) 

rYfry£rT<>'r^<rr^  ^  «rT^mr<>Krrfr<'^>m 
r»r^TTM  «]rr<  m  k>  Kin  t<>  \  «jj^inK>  KUrmr 

Krrr>rrr  \  «Trs  ffr  T<> K)  Tr  K>  A  THK K'<ff  K  m> Trl  \ 
n  ff  t<  ?Trr  rTr  Tfc  W  <K  /<>  ffr  X  ^  <rr  S  1  <K  «rr  ?fr>M»(f? 
^ff  T<>  X  <!<K'  \  H>'{iUM  \  >1iirr'^l'm  \  iTriUfi 


ftfiARy 


Tr»t» 


(A/^; 


cu 


MTOTM  'r^r"r^T<>  \  ffr<fTsr»rTrr"mrri 

<?<T<> \ff>  M  m>TrT\5T<rr  K^  ff -Trr  X  mfrfTr A <KTn 
frt'T^'M  \  m  T^'W  tTt  K'  MX     trrff  fn  ^  <KT<>\ 

'W^i^rrff  K»rrr  ^  mfrfrM  <Kr<>  x^nK-m 

^TrTrf'TrrAfrrfrfrrVrrrST^Mffr<><Kr<>  frr  \  <KY<>\ 

fr  ffr  £T  7<>>T^<rr>  MX  «Tr  i<  frr  r<>  r<rf^  r<>'rrn?rr<i<fr 

K<t't^\  ffr  n'r^>rTriW'«<rr>r^Kfn>rrT\«n?<rrr 
K>  Kr  fr  K'  >  W  1  ffr  ff  >  /£  >  TrM  ^  K<  <rT  >  te  K  rTyTrn 
T«£T>Mm>'rrr?Hr>rrn 

2.   frr?T'Trr\fr ffrferr<'>r£<rrK '^ «TTsrrr<>Kr?^ 
r<>  ^  •T^r-r^rr>  \  i(Si  r<  m  r<-  r<r  ff  K-  \  «nr<  frrK> 

KT  ff  r(>  ffr  ?<  m  '  hJ  \  «Tr  r<  frr  K'  Kf  ff  1<>  1  r'r  (K  r<'<rr 
K ffr ' Trr  A  ,1  ii  1^frh>U<  fTi  K  fTr  >m  \  «Jm  in  K> 
Kl ff  r<>  "I  ffr  <K  r<>  rTr  K'  fn  V>1  <^  ra  fi  K>  fn  \  'T£  1>>1 
TSTJrTrK'ffrX  <£  T  <fr  ^  r  f  f /<>  rnfrfiK'^rrntoMm 
T^  ?r  <K  K>  rTr  \   ^  <rr  ^  \  <K  «rr  ffr  >  M  K  ff  ^  -ff  K>  1 

?r  m  srr^  1  ^  ffr  fcrm<K  k>  frrU  <fr  frm^'inK>\ 

ffrfenfr<'\fr'ffSV 
.5.  KTfrr^Mff  r<>  x  ff  ffr^rK>'r£<rrS  i  «rr^  rr 

T<> Kf  ff  K'  1  'TS  tiKrrx\m  <fr  ^ r> rrr  1'>in  m <"<  ffr  \ 
rf 'Irr  rTr  \  ff  <K  /<>  ffr  '!£  X  -h]  K-  m  \  ffr  TrhJ  A  in 

<Tr sr-T  rTr  K»/Tr  \  frr r^Jhr^T'  rrr \ <Kff'  frr\f,m 
^  T^  fn  \  fTr  rr>mr<  ffi'hnfr'  m  ff  k>  «nt<  f  f  r<'  i 

'MKrTr  \  'Trfr 'r<7f>rrr  A  m^J^l  \  ^rlK- 
T<ni  'TtT  \  <KfT>  ffr>Trr  A  rnKT  «<!<>  \  fTr-I^  A  frr<T<ff 
K>T^  \  rf  rtr  fTrT'Trr  \  ^hl  K>  "I  -rrTKrTr  \  m  if  W  \ 


m  fr  ffr  £T  f?  V  Trl  ffr  ft  \<Sr>r^>K\^^1Kr>1'^\<K-^in 

<s'<fT ?j  \  <TT>fT  m  ^1  \  <><  ff  fr  <rr  r<  \  T^ r'>  m  \ <«rr 

>hl>  T^  ^  T  75  ffr  A  T^  T!  ffr  A  ''TtT  ff  <Tr'  ^  r  «.V  <ff  fr  ffr  \ 
IT  ffr  >Tff  -«  <fr  ^  \  ffr  KT  <fr  ^T  rTr  A  ffr  £  r^T  ffr  K>  \ 
£<-  <fr  fr  ^r  ffr  r<'"A  r^^TKs  ff  K  \  T>;frrW  rrr><fr  /J  \ 
T^  ^  ^  r  fr  \  K'  (r-r  K  \  T^  T-  ffr  ^  >  Trr  T<>  ff  K  A  ^TrT  ^  r  fr 
HTK'  A  m<T<T'-rfrST\K«^rKfff  A  '/r/P-r^r  rTr  A 
W<ff  -Trfff  K'  T'fr  \  <T  <fr  ^  ff  K-  ffr  \'rrrfr>fr  K-  rrr\ 
t>STT;ffr\. 

4-^  KT  ffrJ/rTif  K>  A  Tt  ffr  ^TK"r&<r'rr<  \  «rTe?  rr 
K>T<'  tf  T<>  \  ffr  <ff  ^T>Trrr>>Tff  frr  \  T<>  KW\  fn-rs  ff 
K  A  ff  'Trr  rrr  -  TrT  \  >'T  <rr  K-  fr  *  m  \  K-  <ri  ^  ^  Tfe  rTr  >r£ 
^TTff'TrT  \  'MKffr  \  K<fcT  rTr  ^T^T  \  ^r/f  Wr  >M  \ 
«Tr  5  ffr  T<>  KT  ff  K>  >  Trr  A  rTr  <T  <r'r  K<rr  ^  A  ffr  rr>  /rT  \ 
«TT^  ffr  T<>  T<T  ff  T<'  \  rTr  T<>  ff  K-  \>J^r<Kfn\lTi<rr^1 
•TrT  T»  T  ff  ffr  <K  rTr  \  rTr  fr >  lij  r<  if  >  m  A  <rP  rTr  r<r  >r£  ffr  \ 
Kff  K> ^  ffr  fr  T<» Trr  V Trr r<> S  ffr >  rrr  "^  m  fr 'M^mK1 
^<'hl  A  rTr  >r^  \    rrr  <T  <fT  K'TS  -TrT  ffr  \    r<>  r<r  m\ 

>Trr  ffr  >rji  \  r?  ffr  > frr  1  fri  <K  A  r<>  ^  rr  ff  r<>  ?,  ^  rr  ff  r<>  i 

>TrTKff  K>irr<KK>\'hJK>  \  fr>ff  r<>  V'-^l^M  A  ffr 
'Tfe  ffr  A  ff  <K  r<'  ffr 'Tfe  1  ?rrr  r<'  m\nm^rK-  'Jt<m\ 
«ir  Z<  fff  T<>  KT  rfK'\niriffr^rK'\^  >hl  ff  r>'  fe  />  rrr  \ 

^rfff^TTffr<>  \  '>hiK>nu>\  >hu<.m  \  (wfrr 
r<r  <ff  'Trr  \  ii'^vmif  r<>  \  k>  ki  m  \  «n  ^  k mi^  m 

<»<S  TT  ff  ^  \  ffiff  n^l  n  K'  \  m  l"iri  fn  \  '1>1^  iTr 
ililnU    \   WTTr^rT^<><T<>ffr  1  'm>^l^m  ff    r<> 

<j<T<>  fff  \  <£r <rT  fer  r<>  a  fff  sr^  ^rrr  ff  s  A  ^  sTffr 


<'<fr'ffr  VWfTr^rr 


m  A  <«<>  ri-r  ^  T'  rrr  1  w  ^mh  k-k 


S.   KT  m^M  n  K>  \  fr  ffr  ^TT<>'r^<rrT^  \   «Tmm 

i^ffT^^Trf  1  'i^z<Kfrr  \fri  <ri^i'hjr>'rrrm^<  ffr\ 

TV  <T  (t*?  K  >r^  'Mn   ffr  <rr  ^r>  Wr-irr  ^r'Mr?  r<>  -K?? 

^rTs^rrrfTr>rrrxm>'T^r\T<>  fTr^Mrff  \r>^r5rrr>  TrrA 
ffr  <r  <fT  K  ^r^ '  rrr\ '  hi  m  ^  rri  i  m  <rr  ^r >  rrr  r»rrr  fn\ 

m  fr  >  rrr  \  m  fr  •  hn  fff  <ff  '^I'lrU'^rrifn'rin^  ks  rr  r? 

T<'  frr  K>  ff  K'  1  m  n  ^hP  lit  if  K-  \  ffr  <rr  EI-  ni  I^^Jfi  ffr\ 

frff m rrf' <n >  rs  i  -rr/^r^ m a  )<>  m  \  <k  r<>  rTr ■;  frr  <fr 

?Mrrr»rrr  frr  4<  rTr  1  K'^Vhl  frr  Km  \    <K  <Si '  1^ 

^Trrff  T<>  ^  (ir  rs^Tjr  rTr  VM  m  \  Ki  r^r  r<>  Arj<rff>/rn 

jItI  T<>  iTr  >Trr  ^  £/  m  r£  JTrr  rTr  >  frr  \  >hl  rTr   ^     rTr>rfe 

^Tff\>rrrrTr  \mfrrr£r>/£\. 


/    ?r<Tr  \  'TfcT->r^rT'>  a  rTr<fT^T>Trrr-7ffffr\ 

<KK'  \  rTr r^  frr  K<   •  'Trr\^MK'  \ -m       rTr 

frfrrA  r<ff  K>  ffr -Mff-rrT \    >M£T^rrrf?r<><KT<>  ffrX 

<fr      ffr  A  frr  >«  <fr  *  /£  /£  ^  /rT >  TrT  \  <fTW  Si  ff  /<>  \ 

ff  ffr  £TT<»r£<fr'rrr\  «Tr  ^  ffr  r<>  KI  ff  T<»rrr  ^     ff  t<> 

1.  KT  ffr  >M  H  K  1r1  ffr£TK»I^<fr  r<  \ «Tr  5ffrK> 


TJNIVERSITT 


]?£!       ^n<>  A  mK>\        fu    \  ^hJ>m      K>\ 

fr  ^rm-rrr  A  frrrr    r<>      m<fr  nK'<KK>    m^ 

fr  frr  ^  r  r<'  >  rs  <K  <rr  ^  \  «TRf  ^  ffr  K>  K T  ff  K'  <J <  /<>  rTr  \ 
T<>  KI  ff  K'  <><  K'  frr  1  ff  /^<fr  >  m  ffr  >  rr/  A  frffr  riEr<> 


ffK»rTl\>7rrrr>nr<>fr/\ 


TRANSLATION 


OF  THE 


INSCRIPTIONS. 


THE  "SEPULCHRAL'   INSCRIPTION     OF 
CYRUS.     (M.) 

(PERSIAN,     MEDIAN,    ASSYRIAN.) 

The  oldest  inscription  of  Persia  is  found  on  that 
structure  generally  believed  to  be  the  tomb  of  Cyrus. 
At  Pasargadse,  in  the  midst  of  the  plain  of  Murghab, 
stands  a  building  of  white  marble  rising  to  the  height 
of  thirty-six  feet  from  the  ground.  Its  base  is  forty- 
seven  feet  long  and  forty-four  feet  broad.  A  figure  in 
bas-relief  carved  on  a  pillar,  perhaps  the  portrait  of 
the  king  himself,  strengthens  the  theory  that  this 
structure  is  the  tomb  of  Cyrus.  A  narrow  doorway 
leads  into  an  inner  chamber,  where  Arrian  says,  the 
body  of  Cyrus  was  placed.  Under  the  relief  is  the 
cuneiform  inscription,  the  translation  of  which  follows: 


TRANSLATION. 

I  (am)  Cyrus,  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

For  the  sake  of  comparison   the  reader  is  referred 
to  the  epitaph  of  Cyrus  quoted  byStrabo,  (XV,  3.) 


Ii8 

THE  INSCRIPTION  OF  DARIUS  HYSTASPES 
AT  BEHISTAN.*     (Bh.) 

(PERSIAN,    [median,   ASSYRIAN.]) 

1.  I  (arn)  Darius,  the  great  king,  the  king  of  kings, 
the  king  of  Persia,  the  king  of  countries,  the  son  of 
Hystaspes,  the  grandson  Arshama,  the  Achaemenide. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king  my  father  (is)  Hystaspes,  the 
father  of  Hystaspes  (is)  Arshama,  the  father  of  Ars- 
hama (is)  Ariyaramna,  the  father  of  Ariyaramna  (is 
Caispis),  the  father  of  Caispis  (is)  Achaemenes. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king  therefore  we  are  called  the 
Achaemenides:  from  long  ago  we  have  extendedf  from 
long  ago  our  family  have  been  kings. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king  VIII.  J  of  my  family  (there 
were)  who  were  formerly  kings:  I  am  the  IX:  individ- 
ually we  were  (lit.  are)  kings. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king  by  the  grace  of  Aura- 
mazda  I  am  king :  Auramazda  gave  me  the  king- 
dom. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king  these  are  the  countries 
which  came  to  me :  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I 
became  king  of  them,  Persia,  Susiana,  Babylon,  As- 
syria, Arabia,  Egypt,  which  are  by  the  sea,  Sparda, 
Ionia,  Media,  Armenia,  Cappadocia,  Parthia,  Drangi- 
ana,  Area,  Chorasmia,  Bactriana,  Sogdiana,  Gandara, 
Saka,  Thatagus,  Haravatis,  Maka,  in  all  (there  are) 
XXIII  countries. 

*This  inscription  contains  nearly  one  thousand  lines.  Cf.  Intro- 
duction. 

fThe  Persian  word  amata  is  connected  with  the  Sanskrit  root  ma  to 
measure  (Cf.  Zend  ma  and  Latin  me-to).  The  A  is  doubtless  a  prefix 
corresponding  to  the  Sanskrit  a  (hither),  amata  would  mean  meas- 
ured hither  or  to  the  present  time,  i.e.,  reaching  to  the  present.  It  is 
possible  to  emphasize  the  idea  of  the  root  ma  (measure):  hence  the 
word  might  signify  measured,  tested,  tried. 

:}:The  numerals  are  represented  by  horizontal  wedges  for  units  and 
oblique  for  the  tens.     Cf.  Cuneiform  alphabet 


119 

7-  Says  Darius  the  king  these  (are)  the  countries 
which  came  to  me :  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  they 
became  subject  to  me :  they  bore  tribute  to  me : 
what  was  commanded  to  them  by  me  this  was  done 
night  and  (lit.  or)  day. 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king  within  these  countries 
what  man  was  a  friend*  him  well  supported  I  sup- 
ported :  who  was  an  enemy  him  well  punished  I  pun- 
ished ;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  these  countries 
followed  my  law :  as  it  was  commanded  by  me  to 
them,  so  it  was  done. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king  Auramazda  gave  me  the 
kingdom :  Auramazda  bore  me  aid  until  this  kingdom 
was  established  :  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I  hold 
this  kingdom. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  (was)  done 
by  me  after  that  I  became  king ;  Cambyses  by  name, 
the  son  of  Cyrus  (was)  of  our  family:  he  before  was 
king  here :  of  this  Cambyses  there  was  a  brother 
Bardiya  (i.  e.,  Smerdis)  by  name  possessing  a  com- 
mon mother  and  the  same  father  with  Cambyses ; 
afterwards  Cambyses  slew  that  Bardiya:  when  Cam- 
byses slew  Bardiya  there  was  not  knowledge  t  (on 
the  part)  of  the  state  that  Bardiya  was  slain :  after- 
wards Cambyses  went  to  Egypt :  when  Cambyses 
went  to  Egypt,  after  that  the  state  became  hostile, 
after  that  there  was  deceit  to  a  great  extent  in  the 
provinces,  both  Persia  and  Media  and  other  prov- 
inces. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  there  was  one 
man,  a  Magian,  Gaumata  by  name ;  he  rose  up  from 
Paishiyauvada ;  there   (is)   a  mountain  Arakadris,  by 

*  The  Persian  word  is  of  doubtful  interpretation.  It  looks  like  the 
NOMEN  AGENTis  of  GAM  to  go^  a  goer  hither  or  a  comer.  The  transla- 
tion/rzVwo' is  a  conventional  one. 

f  AZDA,  a  doubtful  word.  I  connect  it  with  the  root  da  to  ktww 
which  occurs  in  the  compound  aur^m^zda. 


120 

name;  from  there  on  the  14th  day*  of  the  month 
Viyakhna  then  it  was  when  he  rose  up :  he  then  de- 
ceived the  state ;  I  am  Bardiya  the  son  of  Cyrus 
brother  of  Cambyses :  afterwards  the  whole  state  be- 
came estranged  from  Cambyses  fand)  went  over  to 
him,  both  Persia  and  Media  and  the  other  provinces: 
he  seized  the  kingdom  ;  on  the  9th  day  of  the  month 
Garmapada  then  it  was  he  thus  seized  the  kingdom  ; 
afterward  Cambyses  died  by  a  self-imposed  death,  f 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  kingdom  which 
Gaumata  the  Magian  took  from  Cambyses,  this  king- 
dom from  long  ago  was  (the  possession)  of  our  family  : 
afterwards  Gaumata  the  Magian  took  from  Cambyses 
both  Persia  and  Media  and  the  other  provinces ;  he 
acted  in  accordance  with?  his  own  power?  he  be- 
came king. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king  there  was  not  a  man 
neither  a  Persian  nor  Median  nor  any  one  of  our  fam- 
ily who  could  make  Gaumata  the  Magian  deprived  of 
the  kingdom ;  the  state  feared  him  vehemently  (or 
because  of  his  violence)  ;  he  would  smite  the  state 
utterly  which  knew  the  former  Bardiya ;  for  this  rea- 
son he  would  smite  the  state  that  it  might  not  know 
mej  that  I  am  not  Bardiya  the  son  of  Cyrus;  anyone 
did  not  dare  to  say  anything  against  Gaumata  the 
Magian  until  I  came ;  afterwards  I  asked  Auramazda 
for  help;  Aurama/da  bore  me  aid;  on  the  loth  day 
of  the  month  Bagayadis  then  it  was  I  thus  with  (my) 
faithful?    men   slew   that   Gaumata   the    Magian   and 

*Lit.  with  fourteen  days;  a  use  of  the  instrumental  which  denotes 
the  association  of  time  with  an  event.  This  idiom  is  employed  in  all 
like  temporal  expressions.     Cf.  Grammar,  72. 

t  The  word  uv^MrtRSHiYUSH  can  be  divided  into  xjva  self  [Ci.  Skt. 
swa  Lat.  se)  and  MrtRSHivusH  die  (Cf.  Skt.  m^r  Lat.  morior).  The 
meaning  also  corresponds  to  the  statement  in  Herodotus  III  64-65, 
that  Cambyses  died  from  a  wound  inflicted  by  his  sword  as  he  was 
leaping  from  his  horse. 

X  Note  the  direct  form  of  expression. 


121 

what  men  were  his  foremost  allies;  there  (is)  a  strong- 
hold Sikayauvatis  by  name  ;^  there  is  a  province  in 
Media  Visaya  by  name  ;  here  I  smote  him ;  I  took 
the  kingdom  from  him  ;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I 
became  king :  Auramazda  gave  me  the  kingdom. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king — the  kingdom  which 
was  taken  away  from  our  family,  this  I  put  in  (its) 
place;  I  established  it  on  (its)  foundation;  as  (it  was) 
formerly  so  I  made  it ;  the  sanctuaries  ?  which  Gau- 
mata  the  Magian  destroyed  I  restored.  The  com- 
merce ?  of  the  state  and  the  cattle  and  the  dwelling 
places,  and  (I  did  this)  in  accordance  withf  the 
clans,  which  Gaumata  the  Magian  took  from  them, 
(I  restored)  ;  I  established  the  state  on  (its)  founda- 
tion both  Persia  and  Media  and  the  other  prov- 
inces ;  as  (it  was)  formerly  so  I  brought  back  what 
(had  been)  taken  away ;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 
this  I  did ;  I  labored  that  our  clan  I  might  establish 
in  (its)  place;  as  (it  was)  formerly,  so  (I  made  it);  I 
labored  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  that  Gaumata 
the  Magian  might  not  take  away  our  race. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  I  did,  after 
that  I  became  king. 

16.  Says  Darius  the  king  when  I  slew  Gaumata  the 
Magian  afterwards  there  (was)  one  man  Atrina  by 
name  the  son  of  Upadara(n)ma;  he  rose  up  in  Uvaja; 
(i.  e. ,  Susiana)  ;  thus  he  said  to  the  state;  I  am  king 
in  Uvaja;  afterwards  the  people  of  Uvaja  became  re- 
bellious (and)  went  over  to  that  Atrina;  he  became 
king  in  Uvaja;  also  there  (was)  one  man  a  Babylon- 
ian Naditabira  by  name  the  son  of  Ain . .  . . ;  he  rose 
up  in  Babylon;  thus  he  deceived  the  state;  I  am  Na- 

*Nam^  is  not  the  accusative  of  specification,  but  is  attracted  into 
the  case,  and  even  the  gender  of  the  subject.  Lit.  there  is  a  strong- 
hold (its)  name  (is)  Sikayauvatis.  Cf.  Grammar,  61,  A.  Note  2,  but 
cf.  Bartholomae,  Arische  Forsch.  I,  58. 

f  Cf.  Grammar,  70,  A. 


122 

bukudracara  the  son  of  Nabunita;  afterwards  the 
whole  of  the  Babylonian  state  went  over  to  that  Nad- 
itabira;  Babylon  became  rebellious;  the  kingdom  in 
Babylon  he  seized. 

17.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  sent  forth 
(my  army)  to  Uvaja;  this  Atrina  was  led  to  me 
bound;  I  slew  him. 

18.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  went  to 
Babylon  against  that  Naditabira  who  called  himself 
Nabukudracara;  the  army  of  Naditabira  held  the 
Tigris;  there  he  halted  and  was  on  shipboard;  after- 
wards I  destroyed  the  army one  (army)  I  made 

submissive,  of  the  other I  led;  Auramazda  bore 

me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  we  crossed  the 
Tigris;  here  the  army  of  Naditabira  I  slew  utterly; 
on  the  27th  day  of  the  month  Atriyadiya  then  it  was 
we  thus  engaged  in  battle. 

19.  Says    Darius    the    king    afterwards    I    went  to 

Babylon;  when  to  Babylon ; 

there  (is)  a  town  Zazana  by  name  along  the  Eu- 
phrates; there  this  Naditabira  who  called  himself  Na- 
bukudracara went  with  his  army  against  me  to  engage 
in  battle;  afterwards  we  engaged  in  battle;  Auramazda 
bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of   Auramazda  the  army 

of  Naditabira  I  slew  utterly 

the  water  bore  it  away;  on  the  2nd  day  of  the  month 
Anamaka  then  it  was  we  thus  engaged  in  battle. 


123 


II. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  Naditabira  with 
(his)  faithful  ?  horsemen  went  to  Babylon;  afterwards 
I  went  to  Babylon;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I  both 
seized  Babylon  and  seized  that  Naditabira;  afterwards 
I  slew  that  Naditabira  at  Babylon. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king  while  I  was  in  Babylon 
these  (are)  the  provinces  which  became  estranged 
from  me,  Persia,  Uvaja,  Media,  Assyria,  Armenia, 
Parthia,  Magus,  Thatagus,  Saka. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king  there  (was)  one  man  Mar- 
tiya  by  name,  the  son  of  Cicikhris — there  (is)  a  town 
in  Persia  Kuganaka  by  name  —  here  he  halted;  he 
rose  up  in  Uvaja;  thus  he  said  to  the  state;  I  am 
Imanis  king  in  Uvaja. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king  then*  I  was  near  by  Uvaja; 

afterwards  from   me the  people 

of  Uvaja  seized  that  Martiya   who  was   chief  of  them 
and  slew  him. 

*01d  Persian  ad<7k^iy.  For  various  theories  respecting  the  meaning 
and  derivation  of  ad;7K<7iy,  cf.  F.  Miiller  (Wiener  Zeitschrift  fur  d.  k. 
des  Morgenlandes  in),  150,  Bartholomae  (Bezz.  Beiter  X.  272).  The 
theory  contained  in  a  late  number  of  the  Zeitschr.  f.  vergl.  Sprchfg. 
is  especially  deserving  of  mention.  The  first  element  of  the  compound 
is  Ava  (Cf .  Skt.  adh^,  Lat.  inde,  Gr.  pvOa)  and  the  second  contains  the 
stem  of  the  interrogative  pronoun,  Ka,  (Cf.  Skt.  ca,  Lat.  que,  Gr.  rs) 
Cf.  Lat.  TUN-c.  ,,Den  indefiniten  und  enclitischen  gebrauch  des 
fragestamms  finden  wir  abgesehen  von  andern  sprachen  (z.  b.  gr. 
Ttoiy  7t7])  auch  im  apers.  ciy  (*qid),  welches  einerseits  den  interro- 
gativstaram  selbst  indefinit  macht  (k^rshsciy),  andererseits  adverb  eine 
indefinite  nebenbedeutung  verleiht  (p^/ruv^/mciy  ,,fruher').  Genau 
wiedas  eben  angefiihrte  p^ruv<?mciy  ist  unser  ad(^?k^7iy  gebildet:  das 
dem  -ciy  entsprechende  kaiy  hat  nur  eine  andere  casusform.  Deren 
locativische  function  ist  bewahrt  (,,in  einem  gewissen  punkte"),  hat 
aber  in  verbindung  mit  der  zeitpartikel  eine  temporale  bedeutungs- 
modification  erhalten.  ad<^?-krtiy  bedeutet  demnach  ,,da  zu  einer  ge- 
wissen zeit"  ,,da  einmal"  d.  i.  ..damals. "  Die  deutsche  partikel 
,'damals"  und  adr?k<7iy  stimmen  also  nicht  nur  in  der  bedeutung, 
sondern  auch  in  der  bildungsweise  und  bedeutungsentwicklung  voU- 
koramen  tiberein." 


124 

5-  Says  Darius  the  king  one  man  Fravartis  by- 
name, a  Mede,  he  rose  up  in  Media;  thus  he  said  to 
the  state;  I  am  Khshathrita  of  the  family  of  Uva- 
khshatara;  afterwards  the  Median  state  which  was  in 
clans  became  estranged  from  me  (and)  went  over  to 
that  Fravartis;  he  became  king  in  Media. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king  the  Persian  and  Median 
army,  which  was  by  him,  it  was  faithful  ?  (lit.  a  faith- 
ful (.?)  thing);  afterwards  I  sent  forth  an  army;  Vi- 
darna^  by  name,  a  Persian,  my  subject  him  I  made 
chief  of  them;  thus  I  said  to  them;  go  smite  that  Me- 
dian army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine;  afterwards 
this  Vidarna  with  the  army  went  away;  when  he  came  to 

Media there   (is)  a  town   in   Media by 

name  —  here  he  engaged  in  battle  with  the  Medes; 
he  who  was  chief  among  the  Medes  did  not  then  hold 
(the  army)  faithful.?;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by 
the  grace  of  Auramazda  the  army  of  Vidarna  smote 
that  rebellious  army  utterly;  on  the  6th  day  of  the 
month  Anamaka  then  it  was  the  battle  (was)  thus 
fought  by  them;  afterwards  my  army  —  there  (is)  a 
region  Kafmjpada  by  name  —  there  awaited  me  until 
I  went  to  Media. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  Dadarsis  by 
name,  an  Armenian,  my  subject,  him  I  sent  forth  to 
Armenia;  thus  I  said  to  him;  go,  the  rebellious  army 
which  does  not  call  itself  mine  smite  it;  afterwards 
Dadarsis  went  away;  when  he  came  to  Armenia,  after- 
wards the  rebellious  ones  having  come  together  went 

against  Dadarsis  to  engage  in  battle a  village 

by  name   in  Armenia;  here  they  engaged   in 

battle;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Aura- 
mazda my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly; 
on  the  6th  day  of  the  month  Thuravahara  then  it  wa^ 
thus  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 

*Cf.  Grammar,  6i,  A,  and  note  i. 


125 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king  a  second  time  the  rebel- 
lious ones  having  come  together  went  against  Dadar- 
sis  to  engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a  stronghold,  Tigra 
by  name,  in  Armenia  —  here  they  engaged  in  battle; 
Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda, 
my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  on  the 
1 8th  day  of  the  month,  Thuravahara  then  it  was  the 
battle  (was)  thus  fought  by  them. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king  a  third  time  the  rebellious 
ones  having  come  together  went  against  Dadarsis  to 
engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a  stronghold,  U. .  .  .ama 
by  name,  in  Armenia  —  here  they  engaged  in  battle; 
Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 
my  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  on  the 
9th  day  of  the  month,  Thaigarcis  then  it  was  thus  the 
battle  (was)  fought  by  them;  afterwards  Dadarsis 
awaited  me  until  I  came  to  Media. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  Vaumisa  by 
name,  a  Persian,  my  subject,  him  I  sent  forth  to  Ar- 
menia; thus  I  said  to  him;  go,  the  rebellious  army 
which  does  not  call  itself  mine,  smite  it;  afterwards 
Vaumisa  went  away;  when  he  came  to  Armenia 
afterwards,  the  rebellious  ones  having  come  together 
went  against  Vaumisa  to  engage  in  battle;  there   (is) 

a  region, by   name,  in  Assyria — here   they 

engaged  in  battle;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the 
aid  of  Auramazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious 
army  utterly;  on  the  15th  day  of  the  month  Ana- 
maka,  then  it  was  thus  the  battle  (was)  fought  by 
them. 

1 1.  Says  Darius  the  king  a  second  time  the  rebel- 
lious ones  having  come  together  went  against  Vaumisa 
to  engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a  region  Autiyara  by 
name  in  Armenia — here  they  engaged  in  battle; 
Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 

ihy  army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly; 

of    the    month    Thuravahara thus    the    battle 


126 

(was)  fought  by  them;  afterwards  Vaumisa  awaited  me 
in  Armenia  until  I  came  to  Media. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  went  from 
Babylon;  I  went  away  to  Media;  when  I  went  to 
Media — there  (is)  a  town  Kudurus  by  name  in  Media 
— here  this  Fravartis  (i.  e.,  Phaortes)  who  called  him- 
self king  in  Media  went  with  (his)  army  against  me  to 
engage  in  battle;  afterwards  we  engaged  in  battle; 
Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 
I  smote  the  army  of  Fravartis  utterly;  on  the  26th 
day  of  the  month  Adukanis  then  it  was  we  engaged 
in  battle. 

I  J.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  this  Fravartis 
with  faithful  ?  horsemen — in  that  place  (was)  a  region 
Raga  by  name  in  Media — here  went;  afterwards  I 
sent  forth  my  army  against  them;  Fravartis  was  seized 
(and)  led  to  me;  I   cut   off   (his)   nose   and   ears   and 

tongue,    and    to   him I    led;    he    was    held 

bound  at  my  court;  the  whole  state  saw  him;  after- 
wards I  put  (him)  on  a  cross  at  Ecbatana,  and  what 
men  were  his  foremost  allies,  these  I  threw  within  a 
prison  at  Ecbatana. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king  one  man,  Citra(n)takhma 
by  name,  a  Sagartian,  he  became  rebellious  to  me; 
thus  he  said  to  the  state;  I  am  king  in  Sagartia,  of 
the  family  of  Uvakhshatara;  afterwards  I  sent  forth 
the  Persian  and  Median  army;  Takhmaspada  by  name, 
a  Mede,  my  subject,  him  I  made  chief  of  them;  thus 
I  said  to  them;  go,  the  rebellious  army,  which  does 
not  call  itself  mine,  smite  it;  afterwards  Takhmaspada 
went  away  with  the  army  (and)  engaged  in  battle 
with  Citra(n)takhma;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the 
grace  of  Auramazda  my  army  smote  that  rebellious 
army  utterly  and  seized  Citra(n)takhma  (and)  brought 
(him)  to  me;  afterwards  I  cut  off  his  nose  and  ears, 
.and  to  him I   led;  he   was   held   bound   at    mv 


12/ 

•court;  the  whole  state  saw  him;  afterwards  I  put  him 
on  a  cross  in  Arabia, 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  (was)  done 
by  me  in  Media. 

16.  Says   Darius   the    king    Parthia   and   Hyrcania 

of  Fravartis called  himself; 

Hystaspes  my  father army after- 
wards Hystaspes  . .  .  allies town  ...  by  name 

they  engaged  in  battle thus 

the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 


128 


III. 

1.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  sent  forth  the 
Persian  army  to  Hystaspes  from  Raga;  when  this 
army  came  to  Hystaspes,  afterwards  Hystaspes  with 
that  army  went  away — there  (is)  a  town  Patigrabana 
by  name  in  Parthia — here  he  engaged  in  battle  with 
the  rebellious  ones;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the 
grace  of  Auramazda  Hystaspes  smote  that  rebellious 
army  utterly;  on  the  first  day  of  the  month  Garmapada 
then  it  was  that  thus  the  battle  (was)  fought  by  them. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  it  became  my 
province;  this  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in  Parthia. 

3.  Says  Darius  the  king  there  (is)  a  region  Margus 
by  name;  it  became  rebellious  to  me;  one  man  Frada, 
a  Margianian,  him  they  made  chief;  afterwards  I  sent 
forth  Dadarsis  by  name,  a  Persian,  my  subject,  satrap 
in  Bactria  against  him;  thus  I  said  to  him:  go,  smite 
that  army  which  does  not  call  itself  mine;  afterwards 
Dadarsis  with  the  army  went  away  (and)  engaged  in 
battle  with  the  Margianians;  Auramazda  bore  me  aid; 
by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  my  army  smote  that  re- 
bellious army  utterly;  on  the  23rd  day  of  the  month 
Atriyadiya  then  it  was  thus  the  battle  (was)  fought 
by  them. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  it  became  my 
province;  this  (is)  what  (was)  done  by  me  in  Bactria. 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king  one  man  Vahyazdata  by 
name — there  (is)  a  town  Tarava  by  name;  there  (is)  a 
region  Yutiya  by  name  in  Persia — here  halted;  he  a 
second  time  (i.  e. ,  after  Gaumata)  rose  up  in  Persia: 
thus  he  said  to  the  state;  I  am  Bardiya  the  son  of 
Cyrus;  afterwards  the  Persian  army  which  (was)  in 
clans  departed  from  duty;  it  became  estranged  from 
me  (and)  went  over  to  that  Vahyazdata;  he  became 
king  in  Persia. 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  sent  forth  the 


129 

Persian  and  Median  army  which  was  by  me;  Artavar- 
diya  by  name,  a  Persian,  my  subject,  him  I  made 
chief  of  them;  the  other  Persian  army  went  with  (lit. 
after)  me  to  Media;  afterwards  Artavardiya  with  the 
army  went  to  Persia;  when  he  came  to  Persia — there 
(is)  a  town  Rakha  by  name  in  Persia — here  this 
Vahyazdata  who  called  himself  Bardiya  went  with 
(his)  army  against  Artavardiya  to  engage  in  battle; 
afterwards  they  engaged  in  battle;  Auramazda  bore 
me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  my  army  smote 
that  army  of  Vahyazdata  utterly;  on  the  1 2th  day  of 
the  month  Xhuravahara  then  it  was  thus  the  battle 
(was)  fought  by  them. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  this  Vahyazdata 
with  faithful.?  horsemen  then  went  to  Paishiyauvada; 
from  thence  he  went  with  an  army  again  against  Arta- 
vardiya to  engage  in  battle;  there  (is)  a  mountain 
Paraga  by  name — here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Aura- 
mazda gave  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  my 
army  smote  that  army  of  Vahyazdata  utterly;  on  the 
6th  day  of  the  month  Garmapada  then  it  was  thus  the 
battle  (was)  fought  by  them  and  they  seized  that 
Vahyazdata  and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies, 
they  seized. 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards — there  (is)  a 
a  town  is  Persia  Uvadaidaya  by  name* — here,  that 
Vahyazdata  and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies, 
them  I  put  on  a  cross. 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  Vahyazdata  who  called 
himself  Bardiya  he  sent  forth  an  army  to  Harauvatia 
— there  (was)  Vivana  by  name,  a  Persian,  my  subject, 
satrap  in  Harauvatis — against  him  (he  sent  an  army) 

♦The  reader  has  noticed  the  constant  use  of  paratax.  Instead  of 
bringing  the  words  of  the  sentence  into  syntax  independent  construc- 
tions are  employed.  In  no  other  language  is  this  loose  arrangtment 
(which  we  must  feel  was  original  to  speech)  shown  to  better  advantage 
than  in  the  old  Persian  inscriptions.     Cf.  Grammar,  59, 


I30 

and  one  man  he  made  chief  of  them;  thus  he  said  to 
them:  go,  smite  that  Vivana  and  that  army  which 
calls  itself  of  Darius  the  king,  afterwards  this  army, 
which  Vahyazadata  sent  forth,  went  against  Vivana, 
to  engage  in  battle;  there  is  a  stronghold  Kapisha- 
kanis  by  name — here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Aura- 
mazda  bore  me  aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  my 
army  smote  that  rebellious  army  utterly;  on  the  13th 
day  of  the  month  Anamaka  then  it  was  thus  the  battle 
(was)  fought  by  them. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king  again  the  rebellious  ones 
having  come  together  went  against  Vivana  to  engage 
in  battle;  there  (is)  a  region  Ga(n)dutava  by  name — 
here  they  engaged  in  battle;  Auramazda  bore  me 
aid;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  my  army  smote  that 
rebellious  army  utterly;  on  the  8th  day  of  the  month 
Viyakhna  then  it  was  thus  the  battle  (was)  fought  by 
them. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  this  man,  who 
was  chief  of  that  army  which  Vahyazdata  sent  against 
Vivana,  this  chief  with  faithful  ?  horseman  went  away 
— there  (is)  a  stronghold  Arshada  by  name  in  Harau- 
vatis — he  went  beyond  thence;  afterwards  Vivana,  with 
an  army  on  foot  went  (against)  them;  here  he  seized 
him  and  what  men  were  his  foremost  allies  he  slew. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  the  province 
became  mine;  this  is  what  was  done  by  me  at  Harau- 
vatis. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king  when  I  was  in  Persia  and 
Media  a  second  time  the  Babylonians  became  es- 
tranged from  me;  one  man,  Arakha  by  name,  an 
Armenian  son  of  Han(i*)dita,*  he  rose  up  in  Babylon; 

♦The  N  in  Handita  as  well  as  the  N  in  Dubana  conjecture  has  sup- 
plied. The  combination  of  wedges  in  the  cuneiform  text  resembles  no 
other  characters  on  the  stone  and  perhaps  is  the  sign  for  L  which 
otherwise  would  be  wanting  in  the  Old  Persian  alphabet.  I,  however, 
feel  that  it  is  simply  a  careless  writing  of  the  nasal. 


131 

there  (is)  a  region,  Duban(?)aby  name — from  there  he 
rose  up;  thus  he  lied;  I  am  Nabukudracara,  the  son  of 
Nabunita;  afterwards  the  Babylonian  state  became  es- 
tranged from  me  (and)  went  over  to  that  Arakha;  he 
seized  Babylon;  he  became  king  in  Babylon. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king  afterwards  I  sent  forth  my 
army  to  Babylon;  Vi(n)dafra  by  name,  a  Mede,  my 
subject,  him  I  made  chief;  thus  I  said  to  them;  go, 
smite  that  army  in  Babylon  which  does  not  call  itself 
mine;  afterwards  Vi(n)dafra  with  an  army  went  to 
Babylon;  Auramazda  bore  me   aid;  by  the  grace   of 

Auramazda,  Vi(n)dafra  seized  Babylon 

on  the  2d  day  of  the  month then  it  was  thus.  . . 


132 


IV. 


1.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  was  done  by 
me  in  Babylon. 

2.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  I  did;  by  the 
grace  of  Auramazda  it  was  (done)  wholly  in  (my) 
way;"^  after  that  the  kings  became  rebellious  I  engaged 
in  XIX  battles;  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I  smote 
themt  and  I  seized  IX  kings;  there  was  one,  Gaumata 
by  name,  a  Magian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Bardiya 
the  son  of  Cyrus;  he  made  Persia  rebellious;  there 
(was)  one,  Atrina  by  name,  in  Uvaja;  he  lied;  thus 
he  said;  I  am  king  in  Uvaja;  he  made  Uvaja  rebellious 
to  me;  there  (was)  one,  Naditabira  by  name,  a  Baby- 
lonian; he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Nabukudracara  the 
son  of  Nabunita;  he  made  Babylon  rebellious;  there 
(was)  one,  Martiya  by  name,  a  Persian;  he  lied;  thus 
he  said;  I  am  Imanis  king  in  Uvaja;  he  made  Uvaja 
rebellious;  there  (was)  one  Fravartis  byname,  a  Mede; 
he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Khshathrita  of  the  family 
of  Uvakhshatara;  he  made  Media  rebellious;  there 
(was)  one,  Citra(n)takhma  by  name,  in  Sagartia;  he 
lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  King  in  Sagartia,  of  the  fam- 
ily of  Uvakhshatara;  he  made  Sagartia  rebellious;  there 
(was)  one,  Frada  by  name,  a  Margianian;  he  lied;  thus 
he  said;  I  am  a  king  in  Margus,  he  made  Margus  re- 
bellious; there  (was)  one,  Vahyazdata  by  name,  a 
Persian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Bardiya  the  son 
of  Cyrus;  he  made  Persia  rebellious;  there  (was)  one, 
Arakha  by  name,  an  Armenian;  he  lied;  thus  he  said; 
I  am  Nabukudracara  the  son  of  Nabunita;  he  made 
Babylon  rebellious. 

*HAMAHYAYA  TH«RDa  is  of  doubtful  intetpetation.  Rawl  suggested 
• 'the  performance  of  the  whole";  Oppert  "dans  toute  ma  vie;  dans 
toute  I'annie,  toujours";  Spiegel  "in  aller  Weiser."  Many  attempts 
have  been  made  to  connect  tharda  with  the  Sanskrit  9arad,  autumn 
used  in  the  Veda  metaphorically  for  year.    Cf .  Grammar,  80,  c. 

I  Or  smote  theirs^  i.  e.,  their  forces.     Cf.  Grammar,  83,  b. 


133 

3-  Says  Darius  the  king  these  IX  kings  I  seized 
within  these  battles. 

4.  Says  Darius  the  king  these  (are)  the  provinces 
which  became  rebellious;  a  lie  made  them* ....  that 
these  deceived  the  state;  afterwards  Auramazda  made 
them  in  my  hand;  as  desire  (moved)  me,  thus 

5.  Says  Darius  the  king  O  thou  who  wilt  be  king  in 
the  future,  protect  thyself  strongly  from  deceit;  what- 
ever man  will  be  a  deceiver,  him  punish  well  (lit.  him 
well  punished  punish.  Cf. ,  1.  8),  if  thus  thou  shalt 
think  **may  my  country  be  firm." 

6.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  I  did;  by  the 
grace  of  Auramazda  I  did  (it)  wholly  in  (my)  way;t 
O  thou  who  shalt  examine  this  inscription  in  the 
future,  let  it  convince  thee  (as  to)  what  (was)  done  by 
me;  do  not  deceive  thyself. 

7.  Says  Darius  the  king  Auramazda  (is)  a  witness.? 
that  this  (is)  true  (and)  not  false  (which)  I  did  wholly 
in  my  way.| 

8.  Says  Darius  the  king  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 

(what)  else  (was)  done  by  me  to  a 

great  extent,  that  (is)  not  inscribed  on  this  inscription; 
for  this  reason  it  (is)  not  inscribed  lest  whoever  will 

examine  this  inscription  in  the  future 

it  may  not  convince  him  (as  to)  what  (was)  done  by 
me  (and)  he  may  think  (it)  false.  § 

9.  Says  Darius  the  king  who  were  the  former  kings, 
by  these  nothing  (was)  done  to  a  great  extent  as  (was) 

*Perhaps  we  can  supply  with  Spiegel  hamitriya  a  He  made  them 
rebellious. 

fCf.  IV.  2. 

XQi.  IV.  2. 

§Although  much  has  become  obliterated  yet  we  have  enough  to 
enable  us  to  gain  the  sense  of  the  passage.  The  idea  is:  should  I 
write  the  memorial  of  all  my  achievements,  they  would  be  so  many 
that  men  would  lose  faith  in  the  testimony  of  this  stone. 


134 

performed*  wholly  by  me  through  the  grace  of  Aura- 
mazda. 

10.  Says  Darius  the  king let  it  convince 

thee  (as  to)  what  (was)  done  by  me;  thus 

for  this  reason  do  not  hide  (this  monument);  if  thou 
shalt  not  hide  this  monument  (but)  tell  (it)  to  the  state, 
may  Auramazda  be  a  friend  to  thee  and  may  there  be 
to  thee  a  family  abundantly  and  live  thou  long. 

11.  Says  Darius  the  king  if  thou  shalt  hide  this  mon- 
ument (and)  not  tell  (it)  to  the  state,  may  Auramazda 
be  a  smiter  to  thee  and  may  there  not  be  to  thee  a 
family. 

12.  Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  I  did  wholly 
in  (my)  way;t  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I  did  (it); 
Auramazda  bore  me  aid  and  the  other  gods  which  are. 

13.  Says  Darius  the  king  for  this  reason  Auramazda 
bore  me  aid  and  the  other  gods  which  are,  because  I 
was  not  an  enemy,  I  was  not  a  deceiver,  I  was  not  a 

despot family  above  law,  above  me 

I  did that  whoever  for  me 

helped  those  belonging  to  my  race,  him  well  supported 
I  supported;  whenever. .  . '. him  well  pun- 
ished I  punished. 

14.  Says  Darius  the  king  O  thou  who  art  king  in 

the  future,  whatever  man  shall  be  a  deceiver 

shall  be (be)  not  a  friend  to  these;  punish 

these  with  severe  punishment. 

15.  Says  Darius  the  king  O  thou  who  shalt  see  this 
inscription  in  the  future  which  I  inscribed  or  these 
pictures,  thou  shalt  not  destroy  (them)  J  as  long  as 
thou  shalt  live;  thus  guard  them. 

*Cf.  IV.  2,  but  here  THaRDa  fails  to  appear. 

fCf.  IV.  2. 

JOld  Persian  yava.  ..Fflr  das auffallige  — a  scheinen  mir  und  zwei 
mOglichkeiten  offen:  es  konnte  yava  nach  abfall  des  t  als  flectierbarer 
a-stamm  vom  sprachgeftihl  aufgefasst  an  das  femininum  t^uma  sich 
formell  anschliessen  (mit  einbusse  der  conjunctionalen  bedeutung), 


135 

l6.  Says  Darius  the  king  if  thou  shalt  see  this  in- 
scription or  these  pictures  (and)  shalt  not  destroy 
them  and  shalt  guard  them  for  me  as  long  as  (thy) 
family  shall  be,  may  Auramazda  be  a  friend  to  thee 
and  may  there  be  to  thee  a  family  abundantly  and  live 
thou  long  and  whatever  thou  shalt  do,  this  for  thee 
(let)  Auramazda let  him  grant  thy  prayers. 

19.  Says  Darius  the  king  if  thou  shalt  see  this 
inscription  or  these  pictures  (and)  shalt  destroy  them 
and  shalt  not  guard  them  for  me  as  long  as  (thy)  fam- 
ily shall  be,  may  Auramazda  be  a  smiter  to  thee  and 
may  there  not  be  to  thee  a  family  and  whatever  thou 
shalt  do  this  let  Auramazda  destroy  for  thee. 

18.  Says  Darius  the  king  these  (are)  the  men  who 
were  there  then  when  I  slew  Gaumata  the  Magian  who 
called  himself  Bardiya;  then  these  men  co-operated  as 
my  allies;  Vi(n)dafranaby  name,  the  son  of  Vayaspara, 
a  Persian;  Utana  by  name,  the  son  of  Thukhra,  a  Per- 
sian; Gaubaruva  by  name,  the  son  of  Marduniya,  a 
Persian;  Vidarna  by  name,  the  son  of  Magabigna,  a 
Persian;  Bagabukhsha  by  name,  the  son  of  Daduhya, 
a  Persian;  Ardumanis  by  name,  the  son  of  Vahauka, 
a  Persian. 

19.  Says  Darius  the  king  O  thou  who  art  king  in  the 
future,  what what  Darius 


I  did. 


Oder  es  hat  nach  analogic  von  yfl-tha,  yata  {,,bis,  warend")und  andern 
auf   -a   ausleutenden  conjunctionen  selbst  langen   auslaut  erhalten. 

Wenn  allerdings  Bh.  IV,  71  yava  ji[vahy  ]  zu  lesen  ist,  so  bleibt 
die  zweite  erklarung  allein  iibrig.  Die  gegenseitige  beeinflussung  von 
partikeln  bietet  nichts  auilallendes:  es  kann  avSV?  (Brugmann  Griech. 
Gramm.  §200)  neben  avev,  ngr.  avtU  neben  avtiy  Torffneben 
tore  u.  a.  nach  analogic  von  yUfjpi-^  etc.,  sowieiiberhauptdasum- 
Bichgreifen  des  auslautenden  -s  in  griech.  partikeln  {OVtOD-<sy  00? y 
etc.)  verglichen  werden."  (A.  T.) 

J.  Schmidt  explains  yava  as  neuter  plural  (172). 


136 


V. 

I.   Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  I  did 

way 

king province;  this  became 

estranged  from  me;  one  man  ..imina  by  name;  the 
(people)  of  Uvaja  made  him  chief;  afterwards  I  sent 
forth  (my)  army  to  Uvaja;  one  man  Gaubaruva  by 
name,  a  Persian,  my  subject,  him  I  made  chief  of 
them;  afterwards  this  Gaubaruva  with  an  army  went 
to   Uvaja;  he  engaged   in   battle  with  the   rebellious 

ones;  afterwards 

and  to  him    


he  seized  and  led  to 


me provmce 

thus  it 


2.    Says  Darius  the  king 


Auramazda by  the  grace  of 

Auramazda I  did. 

3.   Says  Darius  the  king  whoever  in  the  future  .... 


4.   Says  Darius  the  King I 

went  against  Saka 

Tigris to  the  sea 

I  seized  the  enemy to 

Saku(n)ka  by  name,   him  I  seized 

there  another  as  chief 

afterwards 


5.   Says  Darius  the  king not 

Auramazda if  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 

I  did. 


137 

6.    Says  Darius  the  king worship?  Auramazda 


Kossowicz  remarks:  "Notatu  dignum,  omnium,  quantum  scio,  im- 
peratorum,  qui  armorum  vi  atque  gloria  celebres  extiterant,  nisi 
duo,  Darium  Hystaspi  nerape  et  Napoleonem  I  —  mum,  commilitonum 
nomina;  victorias  suas  recensendo,  in  publicis  monumentis  memoriae 
tradidisse. '  * 


138 

The  Smaller  Inscriptions  of  Behistan. 
a. 

OVER   THE   PICTURE   OF    DARIUS.* 

I  (am)  Darius,  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of 
Persia,  king  of  the  countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the 
grandson  of  Arshama,  the  Achaemenide.  Says  Darius 
the  king  my  father  (is)  Hystaspes,  the  father  of  Hystas- 
pes (is)  Arshama,  the  father  of  Arshama  (is)  Ariyaram- 
na,  the  father  of  Ariyaramna  (is)  Caispis,  the  father  of 
Caispis  (is)  Achaemenes.  Says  Darius  the  king  there- 
fore we  are  called  Achaemenides;  from  long  ago  we 
have  extended;  from  long  ago  our  family  have  been 
kings.  Says  Darius  the  king  VUI  of  my  family  (there 
were)  who  were  formerly  kings;  I  am  the  ninth  IX;  in- 
dividually we  are  kings. 


UNDER  THE  PROSTRATE  FORM. 

This  Gaumata  the  Median  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am 
Bardiya,  the  son  of  Cyrus;  I  am  king. 

c. 

OVER  THE  FIRST   STANDING  FIGURE. 

This  Atrina  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  king  in  Uvaja. 

d. 

OVER  THE  SECOND  STANDING  FIGURE. 

This  Naditabiralied;   thus  he  said;  I  am  Nabuk(u)- 
dracara,  the  son  of  Nabunita;  I  am  king  in  Babylon. 

e. 

UPON   THE  GARMENT  OF  THE  THIRD  STANDING   FIGURE. 

This  Fravartis  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Khshathrita 
of  the  family  of  Uvakhshatara;    I  am  king  in  Media. 

♦Cf.  I.  1-4. 


139 
f. 

OVER   THE   FOURTH    STANDING   FIGURE. 

This  Martiya  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Imanis,  king- 
in  Uvaja. 

OVER   THE  FIFTH   STANDING  FIGURE, 

This  Citra(n)takhma  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  king 
in  Sagartia,  of  the  family  of  Uvakhshatara. 

h. 

OVER  THB  SIXTH    STANDING  FIGURB. 

This  Vahyazdata  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Bardiya, 
the  son  of  Cyrus;  I  am  king. 
♦. 

!. 

OVER  THB  SEVENTH   STANDING  FIGURB. 

This  Arakha  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  Nabuk(u)dra- 
cara,  the  son  of  Nabunita;  I  am  king  in,  Babylon. 

J. 

OVER  THE  EIGHTH   STANDING  FIGURE. 

This  Frada  lied;  thus  he  said;  I  am  king  in  Margus. 

k. 

OVER  THE   NINTH    STANDING  FIGURE.* 

This  (is)  Saku(n)ka,  the  Sakian. 

*Herodotus  mentions  the  high  cap  which  was  peculiar  to  the  garb 
of  the  Sakians.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  figure  lis  represented 
on  the  stone  wearing  this  national  head-dress. 


I40 


The  Inscription  of  Alvend.     (O.) 

(PERSIAN.) 

This  inscription  is  engraven  upon  two  niches  on  a 
large  block  of  stone  near  the  base  of  Mt.  Alvend.  Not 
only  is  the  monumental  fame  of  Darius  perpetuated 
by  the  Behistan  mountain,  but  in  different  parts  of  the 
Persian  empire  this  monarch  caused  to  be  inscribed 
historic  records  of  his  reign.  At  Persepolis  the  pal- 
aces declare  the  name  of  their  founder  and  his  prayers 
for  the  protection  of  heaven.  To  Darius  beyond  all 
others  we  are  indebted  for  what  we  have  of  the  Paleo- 
graphy of  Persia. 


I    TRANSLATION. 

A  great  God  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,*  who  created  man,  who 
created  thet  spirit?  of  man,  who  made  Darius  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Darius 
the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  countries 
possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achae- 
menide. 

*AsMAN  {heaven)  is  literally  a  stone  as  we  know  from  its  cognate  in 
Sanskrit.  Probably  the  Persians  regarded  the  sky  as  a  solid  dome; 
cf.  the  Hebrew  word  raqi(a)  (Gen.  I,  8.)  and  our  firmament  (firma- 
mentum). 

f  The  old  Persian  shiyatis  is  the  Avest.  shaiti.  The  Assyrian  trans- 
lates the  word  by  dumqu  '  'blessing. ' '  But  cf .  Fick,  idg.  Wb.  I'  233, 
and  J.  Schmidt  Plur.  d.  idg.  Ntr.  418. 


141 
The  Inscriptions  of  Suez.     (SZ.) 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,  ASSYRIAN,   EGYPTIAN.) 

A  crowned  head  is  carved  upon  the  stone  together 
with  the  following  legend: 

TRANSLATION. 
A. 

Darius  the  great  king;  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide. 


Above  are  a  dozen  lines  of  Persian  cuneiform  text 
the  translation  of  which  follows: 

TRANSLATION. 
B. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda,  who  created  yonder 
heaven,  who  created  this  earth,  who  created  man, 
who  created  the  spirit*?  of  man,  who  made  Darius 
king,  who  gave  the  kingdom   to  Darius;  what  great 

I  (am)  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries  possessing  many  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemen- 
ide. Says  Darius  the  king  I  am  a  Persian;  with  (the 
help  of)  Persia  I  seized  Egypt;  I  commanded  to  dig 
this  canal,  t  from  the  Nile  by  name  a  river  which  flows 
in  Egypt,  to  the  sea  which  goes  from  Persia;  after- 
wards this  canal  was  dug  there  as  I  commanded .... 


»Cf.  note  under  (O). 
tCf.  Herodotus,  IV.  39. 


142 


The  Inscription  of  London, 

(PERSIAN,    MEDIAN,    ASSYRIAN.) 

The  following  short  inscription  can  be  seen  in  the 
British  Museum  on  a  cylinder  which  furnishes  a  fine 
specimen  of  gem  engraving.  A  warrior  in  his  chariot 
is  represented  as  attacking  at  full  speed  a  lion,*  the 
symbol  of  power.  This  warrior  from  his  crown  we 
can  interpret  as  King  Darius.  ,He  holds  his  bow 
ready  for  action,  while  the  charioteer  urges  on  the 
steeds.  This  cylinder  was  carried  to  England  from 
Egypt. 

TRANSLATION. 

I  (am)  Darius  the  king. 

*On  the  Persian  sculptures,  the  lion  and  bull  occur  often,  as  em- 
blems of  strength.  Metaphors  of  this  kind  are  frequent  in  all  oriental 
literature.  In  making  a  list  of  the  epithets  of  the  god  Indra  in  the 
Veda,  one  is  struck  with  the  repeated  comparisons  of  this  sort.  How- 
ever, the  Vedic  poets  drew  from  the  stall  as  the  most  fertile  source  of 
metaphors,  and  it  was  the  later  Sanskrit  which  used  the  beasts  of  the 
forest  more  extensively  for  that  purpose,  (e.  g. ,  the  tiger  of  men,  etc. ) 
In  Biblical  literature  the  reader  is  referred  to  Ezekiel  i.  lo.  "As  for 
the  likeness  of  their  faces,  they  four  had  the  faces  of  man,  and  the 
face  of  a  lion  on  the  right  side.'*  Daniel  vii.  4.  "The  first  was  like 
a  lion  and  had  eagles'  wings."  The  familiar  national  emblems  of 
later  date,  the  Roman  eagle,  the  British  lion,  etc.,  all  had  their  origin 
in  this  early  conception. 


«F  run 

UNIVERSIT 

143  ^N..£^H£0^^ 

The  Inscriptions  of  Darius  at  Persepolis. 

(PERSIAN,    [median,  ASSYRIAN.]) 

The  inscriptions  of  Persepolis  show  that  same  spirit 
of  patriotism  which  characterizes  the  record  on  Mt. 
Behistan.  The  superiority  of  Persia  over  the  pro- 
vinces of  the  empire  is  set  forth  by  the  monarch  with 
the  purpose  of  elevating  the  feelings  of  his  country- 
men and  of  keeping  alive  ever  in  their  hearts  the 
love  of  country.  The  palace  of  Darius  shows  the 
ruins  of  several  departments  with  external  chambers 
which  were  evidently  guard-rooms.  The  roof  of  a 
large  room,  fifty  feet  square,  was  supported  by  pillars, 
the  bases  of  which  remain  to-day.  This  edifice  is 
one  of  those  ruins  which  represent  the  combined  work 
of  several  successive  Achaemenian  kings.  All  the 
structures  stand  upon  the  same  platform  around  which 
are  great  walls  of  hewn  stone.  Two  inscriptions  are 
found  above  the  wall  and  one  on  two  pillars,  which 
read  as  follows: 

TRANSLATION. 

H. 

ABOVE  THE  WALL   SURROUNDING  THE  PALACE. 

The  great  Auramazda,  who  (is)  the  greatest  of  the 
gods,  he  made  Darius  king;  he  gave  to  him  the  king- 
dom; by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  Darius  (is)  king. 
Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  the  country  Persia 
which  Auramazda  gave  me,  which,  beautiful,  posses- 
sing good  horses,  possessing  good  men,  by  the  grace 
of  Auramazda  and  (by  the  achievements)  of  me 
Darius  the  king,  does  not  fear  an*  enemy.  (.?)  Says 
Darius  the  king  let  Auramazda  bear  me  aid  with  (his) 
fellow  gods  and  let  Auramazda  protect  this  country 
from  an  army,  from  misfortune,  from  deceit;  may  not 
an  enemy  ....  come  unto  this  country,  nor  an  army, 

*0r,  THE  Other  (i.  e.,  Ahriman).     Cf.  note  to  (I). 


144 

nor  misfortune  nor  deceit;  this  I  pray  of  Auramazda 
....  with  (his)  fellow  gods;  this  let  Auramazda  give 
me  with  (his)  fellow  gods. 


ANOTHER  INSCRIPTION   ABOVE  THB  WALL. 

I  (am)  Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king 
of  many  countries,  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achae- 
menide.  Says  Darius  the  king  by  the  grace  of 
Auramazda  these  (are)  the  provinces  which  I  subdued 
with  (the  help  of)  that  Persian  army,  (and)  which 
feared  me  (and)  brought  to  me  tribute;  Uvaja,  Media, 
Babylon,  Arabia,  Assyria,  Egypt,  Armenia,  Cap- 
padocia,  Sparda,  Ionia,  which  (are)  of  the  dry  (land) 
(and)  which  (are)  of  the  sea,  and  the  provinces  which 
(are)  in  the  east,  Sagartia,  Parthia,  Zara(n)ka,  Har- 
aiva,  Bactria,  Sugda,  Uvarazamiya,  Thatagus,  Harau- 
vatis,  India,  Ga(n)dara,  Saka,  Maka.  Says  Darius 
the  king  if  thus  thou  shalt  think  **may  I  not  fear  an 
enemy,"*  protect  this  Persian  state;  if  the  Persian 
state  shall  be  protected,  may  this  goddess  (namely) 
this  spirit  (of  patriotism)  for  a  long  time  unharmed^ 
descend  upon  this  race. 

B. 

OVER   THE   PILLARS   IN    THE   PALACE. 

Darius  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the 
countries,  the  son  of  Hystapes,  the  Achaemenide, 
who  built  this  palace.  ' 

*  Dr.  Julius  Oppert  understood  the  Old  Persian  word  ANiYd:  (other) 
to  be  the  only  notion  of  ah  rim  an  found  in  the  inscriptions.  He  ar- 
gued that  the  word  ANiYa  never  means  "enemy:"  The  prayer  he 
translated  ' '  The  good  Principle,  which  has  always  destroyed  the 
Hater  (DUvaisaTaM)  will  descend  on  this  house." 


145 
The   Inscription   on  the  Tomb  of  Darius.      (NR.) 

(PERSIAN,  MEDIAN,  ASSYRIAN.) 

Naqshi — Rustam  is  the  burial  place  of  Darius. 

On  the  face  of  a  mountain  which  rises  to  the  per- 
pendicular height  of  900  feet  are  cut  the  excavations 
which  are  doubtless  tombs.  These  relics  have  a  com- 
mon external  appearance.  They  are  carved  into  the 
rock  fourteen  feet  deep  in  the  form  of  a  cross,  the 
upright  section  of  which  is  about  ninety  feet,  the 
transverse  division  about  fifty  feet.  Four  pilasters 
about  seven  feet  apart  ornament  the  transverse  sec- 
tion, in  the  midst  of  which  is  the  door  of  the  tomb. 
On  the  division  above  the  fa9ade  of  this  sepulchre 
are  the  sculptures.  A  double  row  of  fourteen  figures 
supports  two  cornices.  Two  bulls  form  the  pillars  at 
each  end  of  the  upper  cornice.  On  an  elevated  ped- 
estal of  three  steps  stands  a  figure  dressed  in  a  flow- 
ing robe,  holding  his  bow  in  his  left  hand.  Without 
doubt  this  is  the  effigy  of  him  who  lies  buried  be- 
neath. Opposite  the  standing  form,  on  a  pedestal 
of  three  steps,  is  an  altar,  upon  which  the  sacred  fire 
is  burning,  while  above  is  a  disk,  probably  represent- 
ing the  sun,  of  which  the  fire  blazing  at  the  shrine  is 
the  symbol.  Above  is  the  image  of  Auramazda.  One 
of  these  structures  Ker-Porter  visited,  and  with  great 
difficulty  explored  its  interior.  Although  he  was  not 
able  to  read  the  inscription,  yet  he  conjectured  that 
this  was  the  tomb  of  Darius.  I  quote  him  at  this 
point.  **The  second  tomb  is  the  only  one  whereon 
the  m.arks  of  an  inscription  can  be  traced;  but  over 
the  whole  tablet  of  the  upper  compartment  letters 
are  visible  wherever  they  could  be  introduced;  above 
the  figures,  between  them  and  the  altar,  along  the 
side,  from  top  to  bottom;  in  short,  everywhere  we  see 
it  covered  with  the  arrow-headed  characters  and  in 
good  preservation.      What  a  treasure  of  information 


146 

doubtless  is  there  to  the  happy  man  who  can  de- 
cipher it.  It  was  tantalizing  to  a  painful  degree  to 
look  at  such  a  sealed  book  in  the  very  spot  of  mys- 
tery, where  probably  its  contents  would  explain  all. 
But  it  certainly  is  a  very  distinguishing  peculiarity 
of  this  tomb  that  it  alone  should  contain  any  inscrip- 
tion, and  that  the  writing  on  it  is  so  abundant;  a  cir- 
cumstance that  might  warrant  the  supposition  of  this 
being  the  tomb  that  was  cut  by  the  express  orders  of 
Darius  Hystaspes  to  receive  his  remains."  (Travels 
in  Georgia,  Persia,  Armenia,  ancient  Babylonia,  etc., 
etc.,  by  Sir  Robert  Ker-Porter,  vol.  I,  p.  523.) 

Before  translating  the  inscription  I  wish  to  call  the 
attention  of  the  reader  to  Herod.  Ill,  88. 

TRANSLATION. 


A  great  god  is  Auramazda,  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit*  of  man,  who  made  Darius  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Darius  the 
great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  countries  possess- 
ing many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth  far 
and  wide,  son  of  Hystaspes  the  Achaemenide,  a  Per- 
sian, the  son  of  a  Persian:  an  Aryan,  an  Aryan  off- 
spring. Says  Darius  the  king  by  the  grace  of  Aura- 
mazda these  (are)  the  provinces  which  I  seized  afarf 
from  Persia;  I  ruled  them;  they  brought  tribute  to  me 

what    was  commanded  to   them   by 

me,  this  they  did;  the  law  which  (is)  mine  that  was 
established;  Media,  Uvaja,  Parthia,  Haraiva,  Bactria, 
Suguda,  Uvarazamis,  Zara(n)ka  Harauvatis,  Thatagus, 
Ga(n)dara,  India,  Sakae,  Humavarkae,  Sakae  Tigrak- 
haudae,  Babylon,  Assyria,  Arabia,   Egypt,  Armenia, 

*Cf.  note  to  (O). 
f Or,  EXCEPT  Persia. 


147 

Cappadocia,  Sparda,  Ionia,  Sakae]beyond  the  sea,  the 
lonians  wearing  long  hair*  Patians  Kusians,  Macians, 
Karkians.     Says  Darius  the  king  Auramazda  when  he 

saw  this  earth afterwards  gave 

it  to  me;  he  made  me  king;  I  am  king;  by  the  grace 
of  Auramazda  I  established  it  on  (its)  foundation; 
what  I  commanded  to  them,  this  they  did  as  desire 
came  to  (lit.  was)  me.  If  perchance  thou  shalt  think 
that  manifold  (lit.  a  manifold  thing)  are  these  provinces 
which  Darius  the  king  held,  look  at  the  picture  (of 
those)  who  are  bearing  my  throne,  t  in  order  that 
thou  mayest  know  them;  then  to  thee  will  be  the 
knowledge  (that)  the  spear  of  a  Persian  man  hath 
gone  forth  afar;  then  to  thee  will  be  the  knowledge 
(that)  a  Persian  man  waged  battle  far  from  Persia. 
Says  Darius  the  king  this  (is)  what  (was)  done;  all 
this  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  I  did;  Auramazda 
bore  me  aid  until  this  was  done,  let  Auramazda  pro- 
tect   me  from and    my  race    and   this 

country;  this  I  pray  of  Auramazda;  this  let  Auramazda 
give  me.  O  man,  what  (are)  the  commands  of  Aura- 
mazda, may  he  (make  them)  revealed  to  thee;  do  not 
err;  do  not  leave  the  right  path,  do  not  sin.ij: 

*Cf.  the  Homeric  KaptjKOJ^GJOvreS. 

fThe  northern  throne  of  the  great  palace  contains  five  tiers  of  ten 
warriors  supporting  the  platform  on  which  the  king  is  represented  sit- 
ting, surrounded  by  his  attendants. 

JCf.  Bartholomae  Bezz.  Beitr.  X.  269,  and  Kern  (ZDMG.  XXIII, 
222).  For  meaning  of.  ma  STaRaya,  cf .  Melanges,  Asiat.  Ill,  344. 
Thumb  (Zeitschrift  fiir  vgl.  Sprachforsch,  1891)  translates  ,,0 
mensch!  lass  dir  die  lehre  des  Auramazda  gesagt  sein.  Verabscheue 
sie  iiicht  den  richtigen  weg  (d.  h,  die  lehre  des  A.),  beflecke  ihn 
nicht.  "     I  quote  an  extract, 

"Zunachst  halte  ich  dieerklarung  von  gaista:  als,,stinkend  —  wider- 
wSrtig"  wegen  der  raerkwurdigen  bedeutungsiibertragung  insethische 
fiir  unwahrscheinlich  und  ziehedie  von  selbst  sich  aufdrangende  zuge- 
horigkeit  zu  ai.  gad  ,,sagen,  sprechen"  vor.  Kern  hat  dies  schon 
langst  gesehen  und  in  dem  worte  das  part,  auf  -ta  erkannt;  aber  bei 
einem  transitiven  verbum  durch  die  annahme  medialer  bedeutung 


148 

B. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who 

made  spirit  ?  of  man 

above  Darius  the  king 

Says  Darius  the  king 

by  the  grace  of  Auramazda 


...  .is  violence 
violence 


jenes  verbaladjectivs  den  activen  sinn  ,,(er)  hat  gesagt"  herauszu- 
bringen,  ist  nicht  weniger  gezwungen.  g^?sta  ist  regelmassiges  passives 
particip  und  muss  mit  hya  zusammenconstruiert  werden,  welches  ich 
als  optativ  der  copula  (*siet)  fasse.  Es  istdaher  zu  iibersetzen:  ,,m6ge 
dir  gesagt  sein  die  lehre  des  Auramazda,"  ,,lass  dir  gasagt  sein,  " 
d.  h.  ,,halte  fest  an-  ...  ".  Einen  optativ  hat  in  hya  schon  Bopp 
(Lautsystem  d.  apers.  p.  149)  vermutet,  wenn  auch  seine  weitere 
erklarung  eine  ganz  andere,  verfehlte  ist.  Wir  gewinnen  durch  die 
von  uns  vorgeschlagene  constructionsweise  eine  genaue  parallele  zu  J. 
22  f.  hya  duv^/istrt'm  shiyatis  akhsata:  in  beiden  fallen  ist  hya  von  dem 
nachfolgenden  passiven  particip  getrennt  und  das  subject  in  die  mitte 
genommen;  nurder  gebrauch  des  optativs  ist  verschieden.  An  unserer 
stelle  bezeichnet  er  den  einer  aufforderung  fast  gleichkommenden 
wunsch. 

Eine  gewisse  wahrscheinlichkeit,  dass  hya  das  pronomen  hy^;  nicht 
sein  kann,  sehe  ich  in  dem  umstand,  dass  mit  ausnahme  des  einen 
hya  amakh(7m  t.7uma  (in  gleicher  v^^iederholung  Bh.  I  8  und  A  12)  die 
verbindung  hy^  +  genetiv+  substantiv  durchaus  ungewQnlich  ist.  (Ein 
solches  hya  (oder  tya)  is  dagagen  beliebt  zv^^ischen  subst.  und  nachfol- 
genden gen.  Bh.  I,  85.  89.  95.  II,  69.  Ill,  38  Bh.  I,  69.  71.  II, 
27-  35-40.  46.  55.) 

Die  positiv  ausgedriickte  aufforderung  wird  mit  den  folgenden  in- 
junctiven  nochmals  in  negativer  form  wiederholt.  Die  alte  erklarung 
von  ma  thadaya  ist  nun  natiirlich  unmoglich  gewordeu;  es  ist  die  2. 
pers  sing,  des  injunctivs  wie  die  folgenden  formen  auch.  Ich  ziehe 
th'd  zur  ai.  wurzel  ^ad.  ,,abfallen"  und  sehe  dieselbe  wurzel  im  ger- 
man,  hatjan  ,,hassen",  fiir  das  man  meines  wissens  noch  keine  an- 
knupfung  in  den  vervvandten  sprachen  gefunden  hat  (s.  Kluge,  Etym. 
Wb.  s.  v.).  Die  bedeutungsentwicklung  ist,, abf alien,  verwerfen,  ver 
abscheuen,  hassen ' '  An  imserer  stelle  haben  wir  die  wahl  zu  tiber- 
setzen  ,,falle  nicht  ab"  oder  , , verabscheue  nicht".  Im  letzern  fall© 
bildet  ap.  thad  den  tibergang  in  der  bedeutungsentwicklung  von  ai. 
pcd  zu  german.  hassen.  Die  zweite  bedeutung  ..verabscheuen"  darf 
auf  grand  des  durch  die   medische  tibersetzung   festge&tellten  sinns 


SUPPLEMENTARY  NOTE  TO  NRa. 


As  this  volume  goes  to  press  an  article  (published 
in  1893)  comes  from  the  pen  of  the  distinguished 
scholar  Hiibschmann.  He  insists  on  "iibel"  as  the 
signification  of  Ga^^Ta  (NRa)  against  Thumb's  argu- 
ment (published  in  1891)  which  I  have  quoted  at  some 
length  on  p.   147.      I  add  a  few  extracts. 

"  Auf  diese  erklarung  Kern's  greift  nun  A.  Thumb 
zuriick,  ohne  die  griinde,  die  fiir  Spiegel's  deutung 
sprechen,  zu  erwagen.  Diese  griinde  aber  sind  durch- 
aus  stichhaltig  und  werfen  Thumb's  erklarung  um. 
GaS>Ta  ist  in  der  keilschrift  2.  gattung  durch  ein  wort 

iibersetzt,    das    fruher    siyiuiika,    von    Oppert 

visnika,  von  Weisbach niiisJuiika  gelesen  wird, 

dessen  bedeutung  aber  nicht  zweifelhaft  ist 

und  sein  aequivalent  im  Babylonischen  text  ist  bi-i-shi, 
das  ,,bose"  bedeutet."^ 

Wie  mit  Oa'$r\:a,  steht  es  auch  mit  TY^axyaYa;  die  alte 

erklilrungt  ist  die  richtige Meine  iibersetzung 

lautete:  O  mensch,  der  befehl  des  Ahuramazda,  er  soil 
dir  nicht  iibel  erscheinen."  t 


*BiSHU  seems  to  render  into  x\ssyrian  the  Persian  arika  (ARr?^^?) 
"enemy." 

fi.  e.,  As  an  augmentless  imperfect  third  singular  (Cf.  Grammar 
95B.)  and  connected  with  Avestan  s^m  "seem". 

:j:Cf.  Oppert' s  translation  of  the  Median  "homo  quae  est  Oromazis 
doctrina,  ilia  tibi  mala  ne  videatur".  Also  cf.  translation  of  the 
Median  given  in  foot  note  on  p.  149. 


149 

Gaubaruva,   a  Patisuvarian,   spear-bearer  of  Darius 
the  king. 

D. 

Aspacana,  quiver-bearer?,  a  server  of  the  arrows  of 
Darius  the  king. 

E. 

This  (is)  a  Macian. 

vorgezogen  werden,  warend  ich  andererseits  die  richtigheit  meiner 
erklarung  der  ganzen  stelle  mit  der  med.  und  assyr.  iibersetzung  mehr 
in  iibereinstimmung  finde  als  die  friihere  interpretation:  Med.  quae 
Oromazdis  doctrina  earn  ne  malam  putes.  Assyr.  ,,was  Ormuzd  be- 
fiehlt,  lehne  dich  nicht  dagogen  auf"  (Bezold). 

Fiir  ma  starava  scheint  mir  weder  Bollensens  iibersetzung  ,,falle 
nicht  ab"  noch  Bartholoraae's  ahnliche  ,,verliere,  verlasse  nicht  den 
pfad"  geniigend  von  den  vorhergehended  aufforderungen  sich  abzu- 
heben,  und  ich  haltedaherBartholomae's  zweiten  vorschlag  ,,beflecke 
ihn  (den  pfad)  nicht''  (zu  avest.  a-star«ieti)  fiir  richtiger."  For 
Thumbs'  connection  between  O.  P.  thad  and  Skt.  fad,  cf.  Brugmann, 
Grunde.  I,  397. 


ISO 

THE  INSCRIPTIONS  OF  XERXES  AT 
PERSEPOLIS. 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,  ASSYRIAN.) 

TRANSLATION. 
D. 

UPON  EACH   ONE  OF  THE    FOUR     PILLARS     OF  THE    ENTRANCES     TO  THE 
PALACE   OF   XERXES. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit?  of  man,  who  created  Xerxes  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes 
the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  countries,  pos- 
sessing many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth 
far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achae- 
menide.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king  by  the  .grace  of 
Auramazda,  this  entrance  possessing  all  countries  I 
made;  much  else  (that  is)  beautiful  (was)  done  by*  this 
Persian  (people)  which  I  did  and  which  my  father  did; 
whatever  (that  has  been)  done  seems  beautiful,  all 
that  we  did  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda.  Says  Xer- 
xes the  king  let  Auramazda  protect  me  and  my  king- 
dom and  what  (was)  done  by  me  and  what  (was) 
done  by  my  father,  (all)  this  let  Auramazda  protect. 


UPON  THE  PILLARS  ON  THE  WESTERN  SIDE  OF  THE  PALACE,  WHERE  XERXES 
IS  REPRESENTED  STANDING  WITH  TWO  ATTENDANTS, 

Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  the  son  of 
Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide. 

*I  have  followed  the  old  interpretation,  (Cf.  Oppert,  Journal  Aslat 
XIX,  177  "avec  cette  Perse,  aid^  par  ce  peuple  Perse").  If  wo 
can  regard  ana  as  the  equivalent  of  the  Avest.  prep,  ana  (of.  Gr.  ava) 
we  can  translate  "through  Persia"  (Parsa  being  the  instr.  sing,  or  bet- 
ter ace.  plr.;  Cf.  Grammar,  86,  B.  Note  i.)  Cf.  Zeitschrift  ftlr  ver- 
glelcbende  Sprachforschung.  p.  127  [1891]). 


151 
Ea. 

UPON  THE  WALL  BY  THE  STAIRS  OF  THE  PALACE. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit?  of  man,,  who  made  Xerxes  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes 
the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  provin^ 
ces  possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achae- 
menide.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king  by  the  grace  of 
Auramazda  this  palace  (lit.  seat)  I  made;  let  Aura- 
mazda protect  me  with  the  gods  and  my  kingdom  and 
what  (was)  done  by  me. 

Eb. 

The  above  inscription  is  repeated  on  the  western 
stairs  of  the  palace, 

Ca. 

UPON   THE   HIGHEST   PILLAR   NEAR  THE   SOUTHERN    STAIRS. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit  ?  of  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes 
the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  provinces 
possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achae- 
menide.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king  by  the  grace  of 
Aura*  Mazda  this  palace  (lit.  seat)  Darius  the  king 
made  who  (was)  my  father;  let  Auramazda  protect 
me  with  the  gods  and  what  (was)  done  by  my  father 
Darius  the  king,  (all)  this  let  Auramazda  protect  with 
the  gods. 

*  Notice  that  the  two  members  of  the  compound  are  separated.  CI 
Original  Text  of  the  Inscriptions. 


152 

Cb. 

The  above  inscription  is  repeated  upon  the  walls  of 
the  southern  stairs. 


UPON  THE  STAIRS  OF  THE    PALACE. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit  ?  of  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king, 
one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes 
the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of  the  provinces 
possessing  many  kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great 
earth  far  and  wide,  the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the 
Achaemenide.  Says  Xerxes  the  great  king  what  (was) 
done  by  me  here  and  what  (was)  done  by  me  afar,  all 
this  I  did  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda;  let  Aura- 
mazda protect  me  with  the  gods  and  my  kingdom  and 
what  (was)  done  by  me. 


153 


The  Inscription  of  Xerxes  at  Alvend. 

(PERSIAN,    MEDIAN,    ASSYRIAN.) 

F. 

The  following  inscription  is  engraven  upon  two 
niches  cut  into  a  small  rock: 

TRANSLATION. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda,  who  (is)  greatest  of 
the  gods,  who  created  this  earth,  who  created  yonder 
heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  the  spirit  ?  of 
man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of  many,  one 
lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king,  king  of 
kings,  king  of  the  provinces  possessing  many  kinds  of 
people,  king  of  this  great  earth  far  and  wide,  the  son 
of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide, 


154 


The  Inscription   upon  the  Vase  of  Count  Caylus. 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,  ASSYRIAN,  EGYPTIAN.) 

Qa. 

This  vase  contains  the  three  customary  forms  of 
cuneiform  writing  and  a  line  of  Egyptian  hiero- 
glyphics. The  relic  is  preserved  in  Paris.  Four 
fragments  of  similar  alabaster  vases  containing  the 
same  quadrilingual  inscription  have  been  found  by  W. 
K.  Loftus  in  Susa,  and  are  to  be  seen  to-day  in  the 
British  Museum. 

TRANSLATION. 

I  (am)  Xerxes,  the  great  king. 


155 


The  Inscription  at  Van. 
K. 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,   ASSYRIAN.) 

This  inscription  is  about  sixty  feet  from  the  plain 
below,  engraven  upon  a  niche  in  an  enormous  rock 
which  rises  to  the  perpendicular  height  of  one  hundred 
feet. 

TRANSLATION, 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  (is)  the  greatest 
of  [the  gods,  who  created  this  earth,  who  created 
yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who  created  the 
spirit?  of  man,  who  made  Xerxes  king,  one  king  of 
many,  one  lord  of  many.  I  (am)  Xerxes  the  great  king, 
king  of  kings,  king  of  the  provinces  possessing  many 
kinds  of  people,  king  of  this  great  earth  far  and  wide, 
the  son  of  Darius  the  king,  the  Achaemenide.  Says 
Xerxes  the  king,  Darius,  the  king  who  (was)  my  father, 
he  by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  did  what  (was)  beautiful 
to  a  great  extent,    and  he  commanded  to  carve  this 

place ?  he  did  not  make  the  inscriptions  inscribed; 

afterwards  I  commanded  to  inscribe  this  inscription; 
(let  Auramazda  protect  me  with  the  gods  and  my 
kingdom  and  what  (has  been)  done  by  me.*) 

^Supplied  from  the  Assyrian  version. 


156 


THE  INSCRIPTION  OF  ARTAXERXES  I.    (Qb) 

(PERSIAN,  MEDIAN,   ASSYRIAN,  EGYPTIAN.) 

This  inscription,  which  is  quadrilingual  is  engraven 
upon  a  vase  which  is  preserved  in  the  treasury  of  St. 
Mark's  at  Venice. 

TRANSLATION. 

Artaxerxes,*  the  great  king. 

*The  cuneiform  text  spells  the  name  of  the  monarch  on  the  vase 
ARDAKHCASHCA.  This  spelling  must  be  due  either  to  foreign  pronun- 
ciation or  to  the  ignorance  of  the  workman.  Elsewhere  the  cunei- 
form characters  given  the  regular  artakhshatra.  Cf.  Original 
Text  of  the  Inscriptions. 


157 


THE     INSCRIPTION     OF   DARIUS    II.       (L.) 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,   ASSYRIAN.) 

TRANSLATION. 

ABOVE  THE  POSTS  OF  THE  WINDOWS  IN  THE  PALACE  AT  PERSEPOLIS. 

(This)  lofty  stone  structure  (has  been)  made  by  (one 
belonging  to)  the  race  of  Darius  the  king.^ 

*The  Median  and  Assyrian  translate  the  last  of  this  legend  "in  the 
house  of  Darius  the  king." 


158 

THE     INSCRIPTION     OF     ARTAXERXES 
MNEMON    AT    SUSA. 

(PERSIAN,   MEDIAN,   ASSYRIAN.) 

This  inscription  is  upon  the  base  of  one  of  the  col- 
umns in  the  ruins  of  what  once  must  have  been  a  great 
palace.  Much  of  this  building  was  used  for  the  pave- 
ment of  other  edifices  by  the  races  which  in  after  time 
possessed  this  spot. 

TRANSLATION. 

a. 

I  (am)  Artaxerxes,  the  great  king,  king  of  kings, 
the  son  of  Darius*  the  king. 

b. 

UPON   THE  BASE  OF  THE  PILLARS   IN  THE    LARGB   ROW  OF  COLUMNS. 

This  palace  seems  to  have  been  fashioned  after  the 
model  of  that  of  Darius  at  Persepolis.  In  connection 
with  this  edifice  it  is  interesting  to  refer  to  Dan.  viii. 
2.  **And  it  came  to  pass  when  I  saw,  that  I  was  in 
Susa  (or  Shushan)  in  the  palace,"  etc. 

TRANSLATION. 

Says  Artaxerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings, 
king  of  the  countries,  king  of  the  earth,  the  son  of 
Darius  the  king;  Darius  (was)  the  son  of  Artaxerxes 
the  king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Xerxes  the 
king:  Xerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the  king;  Darius 
(was)  the  son  of  Hystaspes,  the  Achaemenide;  this 

building  Darius,  my  ancestor  made 

Artaxerxes    (my)   grandfather Anakata 

and  Mithra by  the  grace  of  Auramazda  the 

building  I  made;  let  Auramazda,  Anahata  and  Mithra 
protect  me 

♦Cf.  Grammar,  24.  DARaYava(H)usH  (Darius)  although  having  a  stem 
in  u  is  treated  like  nouns  whose  stems  end  in  a.  So  in  Prakrit  there 
is  a  strong  tendency  for  the  so-called  first  declension  to  trespass  upon 
the  others,  thus  breaking  down  the  barriers  which  were  observed  by 
the  Sanskrit. 


159 


THE     INSCRIPTION     OF     ARTAXERXES 
OCHUS  AT  PERSEPOLIS.     (P.) 

(PERSIAN. ) 

TRANSLATION. 

UPON    THE   STEPS   OF   THE   PALACE. 

A  great  god  (is)  Auramazda  who  created  this  earth, 
who  created  yonder  heaven,  who  created  man,  who 
created  the  spirit?  of  man,  who  made  me,  Artaxerxes, 
king,  one  king  of  many,  one  lord  of  many.  Says 
Artaxerxes  the  great  king,  king  of  kings,  king  of 
countries,  king  of  the  earth.  I  (am)  the  son  of  Arta- 
xerxes, the  king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius 
the  king;  Darius  (was)  the  son  of  Artaxerxes  the 
king;  Artaxerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Xerxes  the  king; 
Xerxes  (was)  the  son  of  Darius  the  king;  Darius  was 
the  son  of  Hystaspes  by  name;  Hystaspes  was  the  son 
of  Arshama  by  name,  the  Achaemenide.  Says  Artax- 
erxes the  king  this  lofty  stone  structure  (was)  made 
by  me  during  my  reign  (lit.  under  me).  Says  Artax- 
erxes the  king  let  Auramazda  and  the  god  Mithra 
protect  me  and  this  country  and  what  (was)  done  by 
me. 


THE  INSCRIPTION  OF  ARSACES, 

(PERSIAN.) 

TRANSLATION. 

UPON   THE   SEAL    OF   GROTEFEND. 

R. 

Arsaces  by  name,  son  of  Athiyabaushana. 


PERSIAN-ENGLISH 

VOCABULARY, 


VOCABULARY. 


For  the  sake  of  convenience  in  comparison,  the  same  method  of 
transliteration  is  adopted  for  Sanskrit  and  Avestan  words  as  for  Old 
Persian. 


A. 

A, —  prefix,  to.  Skt.,  a;  Avest. ,  a;  Lat.  a(?)  'from'. 
(For  postpositive  a,  cf.  Bezz.  Beitr.  XIII.) 

Ai, —  pron.  root  in  ait<2,  aiv<^. 

Ait<7,  —  n.  pr.,  this,  that.  Skt.  et^t;  Avest.,  aet^d; 
Lat.,  iste;    Goth.,  thata;    Eng.,  that. 

K\na, —  name  of  the  father  of  Naditabira. 

Aiv^, —  one.      Skt.,  ek^;    Avest.,  aev<^. 

Autiyar^, —  name  of  a  country  in  Armenia. 

Aur^  or  A(h)ur^, —  i)  m.,  master,  ruler)  2)  f.,  god- 
dess.     Skt.,  asur^;    Avest.,  ahur^. 

Aur^m^zda  or  A(h)ur^m^zda, —  the  name  of  the 
greatest  deity.  Aur^,  see  above;  m^izda,  com- 
pound of  m^z,  great:  Skt.,  m^h^t;  Lat.,  mag- 
nus;  Goth.,  mag;  AS.,  magan;  Eng.,  might;  and 
da,  give:  Skt.,  da;  Avest.,  da;  Lat.,  do:  or  da, 
know. 

Akhsh, —  to  see,  Skt.,  akshi;  Lat.,  oc-ulus.  (Cf. 
Paul  Kretschmer  in  Zitsch.  fiir  vergl.  Sprach- 
forsch,  p.  432  [1 891]). 

—  with  p^ti,  to  oversee,  rule. 

Akhsh^ta,- — whole,  entire,  perfect.  Fern,  of  an  ad- 
jective, akhsh^t^.      Skt.,  aksh<3:t^. 


1 64 

Ag^ta, —  nomen  2igQr\t\s',  coiner^  frtend{}).     Cf.  g^m. 

Aj(?), —  drive,  do.  Skt.,  aj;  Lat.,  ago.  (It  is  pos- 
sible to  refer  3.]ata  to  j^n,  smite.) 

Atiy, —  yerhsX^r&^i'K,  beyo7td,  across.  Skt. .  ati;  Lat., 
et;  Old  German,  anti(.?);  Germ.,  und(.?);  Eng. , 
and(.?). 

Ath<3:(n)g^in<3;, — stony ^  built  of  stone, 

Athura,  —  Assyria. 

Atrin<3;,  —  proper  name. 

Atriyadiy<^, —  name  of  a  month. 

Ad(^,  —  then,  thereupon. 

Ad<^k<a:iy, —  then. 

Ad<^m, —  /.  Skt.,  ah^m;  Avest.,  azem;  Lat.,  ego; 
Goth.,  ik;  AS.,  ik  or  I;  Eng.,  L  (For  kh  in 
amakham,  cf.  idg.  Forschungen,  p.  i86  [1892]; 
for  position  of  m^iy  and  mam,  cf.  Wachernagel, 
Uber  ein  Gesetz  der  idg.  Wortstell,  ibid.). 

Aduk^nish. —  name  of  a  month. 

An^^h^t^, —  Genius  of  the  waters. 

Anam<3:k<3;. —  name  of  a  month. 

Aniy<^, —  i)  indef.  pron.,  another]  2)  enemy}  Skt.^ 
a.nya;    Avest.,  any  a. 

Anuv, —  prep,  with  loc,  along,  by.      Skt.,  anu. 

Anushiy^, — follower.  See  anuv  and  shiyu;  cf.  Lat., 
comes  (con-eo). 

A(n)t^r, —  prep,  with  diCc,  within,  in.  Skt,  ant^r; 
Avest.,  ant<3:re;    Lat.,  inter;    Goth.,  undar. 

Ap<2,  —  verbal  prefix, /r(?;;/.  Skt.,  ap<3:;  Avest.,  ap^; 
Lat.,  ab;    Goth.,  af;    Eng.,  of. 

Ap^t^r^,  —  remote,  another.      Comparative  of  ap^-. 


i6s 

Ap^dan^,  —  work^  temple^  building. 

Ap^^nyak^,  —  ancestor. 

Ap<3:r^m,  —  adv.,  afterward. 

Ap^riy, —  near  by. 

Api,  —  zvater.      Skt.,  ap;    Avest. ,  ap. 

Apiy, —  to,  also.      Skt.,  api;    Avest.,  api. 

Abac<3;rish,  —  commerce. 

Ab^shta, —  law. 

Abiy, —  prep,  with  ace,  to,  against.  Skt.,  abhi; 
Avest.,  aibiy;    Lat.,  ob(.?),  ambi. 

Abish, —  prep,  with  loc,  by,  at. 

Amuth^, —  there,  then.     Skt.,  amutr^. 

Kya<\aVia, —  ace.  pi.,  ay<^d<^na,  sanctuaries,  homes. 

Ay^sta, —  adv.  or  prep,  with  ace,  according  to,  withy 
unto  (?). 

Ar^k^drish, —  name  of  a  Persian  mountain. 

Ar^kh^, —  name  of  an  Armenian. 

Ar^bay^, —  i)  Arabian;    2)  Arab,  Arabia. 

Arik<3!, —  enemy.      Skt.,  ari. 

Ariy^, —  i)  Aryan;  2)  noble.  Skt.,  ary^;  Avest., 
airya;  New  Persian,  Iran;  Keltic,  erin;  Eng., 
Ir-ish. 

Ariyar^mn^  or  Ariyaramn^, —  name  of  the  great- 
grandfather of  Darius.  Ariy^  and  r^m,  to  rejoice. 
(For  change  of  stem,  cf.  Bartholomae,  idg. 
Forsch.,  p.  180  [1892]). 

Aruv^st^m  (.?) 

Art^khsh^tra, —  Artaxerxes.  Arta  (Avest.,  areta), 
lifted  up;    and  khsh^tr^,  kingdom. 


i66 

Artavardiya, —  name  of  one   of  the   commanders  of 
Darius  Hystaspes. 

Ard^khC(^shch^, —  name  of  Artaxerxes  as  pronounced 
by  the  Egyptians. 

Ard<3:stan<^,  —  /li^-Zi  structure. 

Ardum<^nish, —  name  of  one  of  the  Persians  who  swore 
with  Darius  against  Smerdis. 

Arbira,  —  Arbela\    a  city  upon  the  confines  of  Media. 

Arm^niy<7, —  i)  Armenian\    2)  Armenia, 

Arming,  —  name  of  Armenia. 

Arminiy^,  —  Armenian. 

Arsh<3:k^, —  Arsaces. 

Arshada, —  name  of  a  fortress  in  Arachasia. 

Arsham<3!, —  name  of  the  grandfather  of  Darius   Hys- 
taspes. 

Arshtish,  —  spear.     Skt.,  rshti;    Avest.,  arsti. 

Arshtib^^r*^;,  —  spear-bearer. 

Ava, —  dem.  pron.,  this,  that.      Avest.,  avrt:;     Slav., 
ova. 

Av^,  —  verbal  prefix, /r^;/^.      Skt.,  av^. 

Ava,  —  so  long.      Correl.  to  yava. 

Av^tha, —  thus. 

Av^da, —  i)  there'y    2)  thither. 

—  In  ablative  sense  with  sufifix  sa,  from  thai  place ^ 
thence. 

Av^p^ra, —  thence. 

Av^shciy,  —  whatever,  anything,  all.      Awa-oXy. 

Av^h.  —  aid,  guard.     Avest.,  avo. 


16/ 

Av^h, —  denom.  from  preceding. 

—  with  prefix  p^tiy,  to  seek  aid. 

Av^hy<3;radiy, — for  this  reason^  therefore.  Composed 
of  gen.  of  pron.  av^,  and  loc.  of  rad. 

Av^h^n^m, —  village]  from  root  v^h,  to  dwell.  Skt., 
vas;  Lat.,  vesta;  Germ.,  woh-nen;  AS.,  wesan; 
Eng.,  was. 

Ksagavta, —  Sagartian. 

As^g<2rtiya, —  Sargartian. 

As^bari,  or  asbari,  —  soldier)   properly,  a  horseman. 

Asp^c^na, —  a  proper  name  in  Persia.  Probably 
from  asp^,  horse;  according  to  Herodotus,  the 
name  of  a  man.  (For  asp^,  cf.  Meyer  in  idg. 
Forsch.,  p.  329  [1892]). 

Asm^n,  —  heaven.     Skt.,  a9m<3;n. 

Ashn^iy, —  near. 

Azda, —  knowledge. 

Ah, —  to  be.  Skt.,  as;  Avest,  ah;  Lat.,  es-t;  Goth., 
is-t;    Eng.,  is. 

Ahifr^stad,  —  severe  punishment, 

I 

I, —  to  go.     Skt.,  I;   Avest,  I;    Lat..  i-re. 

—  with  prefix  atiy,  to  go  beyondy  carry  farther. 

—  with  nij,  to  go  forth. 

—  with  p^tiy,  to  go  against. 

—  with  p^ra,  to  proceed. 

—  with  ap(^ri,  to  follow,  obey. 

Ida, —  here.     Skt.,  ih^;    Avest.,  idha. 


i68 

Ima,  —  pron.,  Ms.     Skt.,  ima;    Avest.,  ima. 

Im^ni, —  name  of  a  man  in  Susa,  who  excited  a  tumult 
against  Darius. 

Ish,  —  to  send.      Skt,  ish;    Avest.,  ish. 

—  with  prefix  fr^,  to  send  forth, 

Ishu,  —  arrow.     Skt,  ishu. 

Izav<3;, —  tongue. 

U 

(H)u, — good,  well.  It  occurs  only  in  the  beginning 
of  a  compound.      Skt.,  su;    Avest.,  hu. 

Uta, —  and.     Skt.,  uU;    Avest.,  ut^. 

Utan«, —  name  of  one  of  the  six  who  dethroned  false 
Smerdis. 

Ud, —  verbal  prefix.      Skt.,  ud. 

Up^, —  prefix,  under,  to.  Skt,  up^;  Avest,  upa; 
Lat.,  sub. 

Upa, —  prep,  with  ace,  under.      Cf.  above. 

Up^d^r^(n)m^, —  name  of  a  man  in  Susiana. 

Up^riy, —  prep,  with  ace,  above,  over.  Skt.,  up<3:ri; 
Avest.,  upara;  Lat.,  super;  Goth.,  ufar;  Eng., 
over. 

Up^sta, —  aid,  help.  Upa  and  sta;  cf.  Germ.,  bei- 
stand. 

(H)ufr^st^, —  see  p^rs. 

(H)ufratu,  —  Euphrates.  From  u,  well;  and  fra  (per- 
haps a  Semitic  root),  to  flow. 

(H)ub<3!rt^,  —  see  b^r. 

(H)um«rtiy<2, — possessing  good  men. 

(H)uv^khsh^t^r<3;, —  name  of  a  king  of  Media. 


1 69 

(H)uv^j^, —  Susiana. 

(H)uv^jiy^, —  an  inhabitant  of  Susiana. 

(H)uv^sp^, — possessing  good  horses. 

(H)uvaip^shiy^, —  one's  own  pleasure,  independence, 
(h)uva,  self;    Skt.,  sv^;    Lat. ,  suus. 

Uvad^id^y^, —  name  of  a  city  in  Persia. 

(H)uvam<3:rshiyush,  —  committing  suicide.  (h)uva, 
self;  Skt.,  sv<3;:  and  m^rsh;  Avest.,  meresh,  to  die. 

(H)uvar<2z^mi  or  (H)uvar^z^miy^, —  Chorasmia. 

Us,— cf.  ud. 

Us^t^sh^n^,  —  lofty  building,  temple.  Us  (see  above) 
and  t^sh;  Skt.,  t^^ksh;  Avest.,  t^sh,  to  form; 
Lat.,  tig-mum. 

(H)ushk«,  —    dry.        Avest.,    hushka.  (Cf.    idg. 

Forschungen,  Bartholomae,  p.  488  [1892]). 

Uz^ma, —  cross. 

Uhyam^, —  name  of  a  castle  in  Armenia. 

K 

K^,  —  interrog.  pron.,  who.  Skt.,  k^;  Avest.,  Va\ 
Lat.,  qui. 

—  with  personal  or  relative  pronoun   having  an  in- 
definite force:    {whomever. 

Y^UMia, —  mountain. 

K«t^p^tuk<3:,  —  Cappadocia. 

Y^an, —  to  dig,  scratch.  Skt.,  kh^n;  Avest,  Vax\\ 
Lat.,  cun-iculus. 

—  with    prefix  av^,  to   throw    down    with  violence^ 
displace. 

—  with  ni,  to  dig  down,  destroy, 

—  with  vi,  to  destroy. 


I70 

Kamana, —  de sir ouSy  faithful.     Skt,  Vava^  to  desire; 
few} 

K<3;(m)p^d^, —  name  of  a  province  in  Media. 

K^(m)bujiy/3:, —  Cambyses. 

K^r, —  to  do.       Skt.,  kr;     Avest..  Vax\      Lat.,  cre-o. 

—  with  prefix  p<3;ri,  to  guard. 
K^shciy, —  indef.  pron.,  whoever, 

—  with  preceding  n^^-iy,  no  one. 
Karkay — name  of  a  people. 

Kapish<3:kani, —  name  of  a  fortress  in  Arachasia. 

Kam^, —  wishy  desire.      Skt.,  kam^. 

Kar<3:, —  i)  people]    2)  army.      Cf.  kar. 

Kug^n<7:ka, —  name  of  a  city  in  Persia. 

Kud(u)ru, —  name  of  a  city  in  eastern  Media. 

Kuru, —  Cyrus. 

Kushiy<3;, —  name  of  a  people. 

Kh 

Khsh^tr^ — nom.   and    ace,   khsh^tr^m;     rule,  king- 
dom.    Skt.,  ksh^tr^;    Avest.,  \i\\s\ia\}i\ra. 

Khsh^tr^^pav^n, —  nom.,  khsh(2tr<2pava;  satrap.   From 
khsh^tr<aj  (cf.  above)  and  pa  (to  guard,  protect). 

Khsh^thrit<3;, —  name  of  a  man  who  excited  a  tumult 
against  Darius  in  Media. 

Khsh^p^, —  ace,    khsh^p^;      night,         Skt,    ksh^p; 
Avest.,  khsh^p. 

Khshay^thiy^,  —  king.         (Cf.    Brugmann    in    idg. 
Forschungen,  p.  177  [1892]). 

Khsh^y  arsha,  —  Xerxes. 


171 

Khshi  (?) 

—  with  prefix  p^ti,  to  rule,  reign.      (It  is  possible  to 
refer  patiy^khsh^iy  to  akhsh,  see). 

Khshnas, —  to  know.  (Perhaps  connected  with  Skt. , 
J;2a;  Avest.,  khshna;  Lat.,  co-gno-sco;  Goth., 
kaun;    Germ.,  kann;    Eng. ,  know,  can). 

G 

G^^itha, — flock,  herd. 

Qa\}S:>axwva, —  Gobryas.     The  name  of  a  man. 

G^umat^, —  name  of  a  Magian. 

G^ushrt:, —  ace.  dual,  g^usha;    ear.       Avest.,    g<3:osh^. 

G^(n)dut<^v^, —  name  of  a   country  in   western  Ara- 

chosia. 
Qia{yi)Aaxa, —  name  of  a  country  near  the  Indus. 

G^m, —  to  go.  Skt.,  g^m;  Avest.,  g^m;  Lat.,veniD 
(for  guemio  .?);  Goth.,  quam;  Germ.,  kommen; 
Eng. ,  come. 

—  with  prefix  a,  to  approach,  come. 

—  with  h^m,  to  gather  ones  self  together, 

—  with  p^ra,  to  depart. 

G^rb, —  to  seize,  take.  Skt.,  gr^bh;  Avest.,  g^rep; 
Germ.,  greif-en  (J);    Eng.,  gripe  (.?). 

G<^rm<3;p^d^, —  name  of  a  month. 

G^st^, —  revealed,  declared.      Skt.,  g^d. 

G<^thu, —  \)  foundation,  firm  place',  2)  throne.  Avest., 
gathu. 

Gud, —  Skt.,  guh;    Avest.,  guz. 

—  with  prefix  ap<^,  to  conceal. 

Gub, —  to  speak)    middle,  to  be  called  ox  named. 


172 

C 

Cmshpi, —  son  of  Achaemenes. 

C^shm^, —  eye. 

Ca, —  end.,  a7id.      Skt.,  Q.a\    Avest,  ca;     Lat.,  que. 

Ciy, —  neut,,    ciy   and    cish;    who,  what.        Skt.,  cit; 
Avest.,  ci. 

—  cishciy,  whatever.      (For  change  of  etym.  t  to  sh 
before   c,   cf.  idg.  Forschungen,    p.  488   [1891]). 

—  anivrtshciy,  some  other. 
Ciya(n)k^r^m, — how  many,  manifold, 
Cicikhri, —  name  of  a  man. 

Cita, —  so  long  as. 
Citr^, —  seed,  offspring. 
Citr^(n)t^khm^, —  name  of  a  man. 

J 

J^, —  to  supplicate,  pray;  to  grant  prayer, 
Jatar, —  nom.  j^ta,  enemy.      Cf.  j^n. 
J^n, —  to  smite.     Skt.,  h^^n;    Avest.,  ]axi. 

—  with  prefix  av^,  to  smite  down,  kill. 

—  with  fr^,  to  cut  off. 

Jiv, —  to  live.     Skt.,  jiv;    Avest.,  jiv;    Lat.,  vivo. 
Jiv^, — life. 

T 

T^iyiy^  or  maly'iya, —  doubtful  word  (witness  ?). 

T^uma, —  race,  family.     Avest.,  t^okhma. 

T«k^b<3;r^, —  epithet   of  the   Greeks,  wearing  crowns, 
wearing  long  hair. 


173 

Takhmaspsida, —  name  of  one  of  the  commanders  of 
Darius. 

Tt^khs,  —  fo  construct^  build.  Skt. ,  trt:ksh ;  Avest. , 
t^sh. 

—  with  prefix  h<^m,  to  work  together,  help,  work. 

Tacava, —  building,  temple. 

Tar, —  to  cross,  put  across.  Skt.,  tr  ;  Avest. ,  t^r; 
Lat.,  in-tra-re,  trans;  Old  German,  durh;  Eng., 
through. 

—  with  prefix  fr^,  to  go  forward. 

—  with  vi,  to  put  over  or  across. 

Taradaraya, —  across  the  sea)  from  t^r<3;,  across,  and 
davaya,  the  sea. 

T^rs, —  to  tremble,  fear.      Skt.,  tr^^is;    Avest.,  t^rs-ti. 

Tar<3;va, —  name  of  a  city  in  Yutia  of  Persia. 

Tigr^, —  name  of  a  fortress  in  Armenia. 

Tigra, —  Tigris]  perhaps  feminine  of  an  adjective, 
tigr^,  sharp.  Skt.,  tij.  Cf.  Dionys.  perig.  v. 
984,   ''The  Medes  call  the  Tigris  an  arrow." 

Tigr<i:kh<^ud^, —  name  of  a  Scythian  tribe. 

Tuv<^m, —  thou.  Skt.,  tv^m;  Avest.,  thw^m;  Lat., 
tu;  Germ.,  du.  (Cf.  Wachernagel,  tiber  ein  Ge- 
setz  der  idg.  Wortstellung,  idg.  Forsch.,  p.  403 
[1892]). 

Ty^, —  rel.  pron.,  who,  that.     Skt.,  y^;   Avest.,  hy^; 

—  ty^patiy,  whatever. 


174 

Th 

Thai^^rci, —  name  of  a  month. 

Thakata., —  t/ien  (?).  (This  meaning  is  a  conventional 
one.  A  recent  theory  proposes  a  widely  differ- 
ent signification,  but  at  present  both  the  etymol- 
ogy and  interpretation  of  the  word  are  doubtful). 

Thatagush, —  name  of  a  people. 

Th^d, —  ^0  £•{?,  err(?).  (Perhaps  connected  with:  Skt., 
sad;    Lat.,  sideo;    Got.,  sat;    Eng.,  sit). 

Th<3:h, —  U  say^  speak.     Thatiy  for  Th^h^tiy. 

Thukhr^, —  name  of  a  Persian. 

ThwraYshara, —  name  of  a  month. 

Th^rd, —  kind,  sort,  manner, 

Tr 

Tr<3:r. 

—  with  prefix  ni,  to  restore. 

Tritiy^, —  third.  Skt.,  tritly^;  Avest.,  thrity^; 
Lat.,  tertius;    Goth.,  thridya;    Eng.,  third. 

D 

D(3;usht^r,  — friend, 

D<3:n,  —  to  flow. 

D^r,  —  to  hold,  to  hold  one's  self)  to  delay,  halt, 
Skt. ,  dhr  ;    Avest. ,  d^r. 

D^r^y^, — sea. 

D^rsh,— /^  dare,  subdue.  Skt.,  dhrsh;  Avest, 
d^resh;    Eng.,  durst. 

D^rsh^m, — strongly,  very. 

D^rsh^m^, —  insolence,  ferocity ^  violence. 


175 

D^st^, —  hand.      Skt.,  \ias\.a\    Avest.,  zasta. 
D^sh<3;bari,  —  stretching  out  the  hand^  submissive, 

D^hyaush, —  region^  province.     Skt.,  d<a:syu;  Avest., 

daqyu. 

Da, —  to  give.     Skt.,  da;    Avest.,  da;    Lat.,  da-re. 

Da, —  to  place y  create,  do,  make.  Skt.,  dha;  Lat., 
con-do,  cre-do;    AS.,  dom;    Eng.,  doom. 

Da, —  to  know,  understand.     Avest.,  da. 

Dat^,  —  law.     Cf.  da. 

Dad^^rshi, —  a  name  of  an  Armenian  and  Persian. 

Daduhy<3:,  —  one  of  the  six  who,  with  Darius  Hystas- 
pes,  deprived  false  Smerdis  of  his  kingdom. 

Dar^y^V(^(h)u,  —  Darius.  Cf.  d^r;  for  second  mem- 
ber of  the  compound,  cf.  Skt.  v<7su,  good;  as  a 
noun,  wealth:  perhaps  from  was,  to  shine  (like 
Eng.  splendid).  Cf.  Lat.,  us-tus,  Ves-uvius; 
Eng.,  East. 

Dasy^m^n, —  he  who  stretches  forth,  serves;  an  at- 
tendant (perhaps). 

Di, —  pron.  root,  this.  (Cf.  Wachernagel,  iibdi-  ein 
Gesetz  der  idg.  Wortstellung,  idg.  Forsch.,  p. 
405  [1892]). 

Di, —  to  see.     Avest.,  di. 

Di, —  to  remove,  take  away, 

Dida, — castle. 

Dipi, —  letter,  inscription.  Perhaps  connected  with 
Skt.,  lip. 

Duban<3!, —  name  of  a  country  in  Babylonia. 

Dur^, —  loc.  durmy,  dur<3:y,  and  dur^^i;  far^  distant. 
Skt.,  dur<^. 


176 

Duru j,  —  to  deceive,  be  false.     Skt. ,  druh ;  Avest. ,  druj. 

Duruv^, — firm,  well,  sound,  secure.     Skt.,  dhruv^. 

Duv^isht^m,  —  a  long  time. 

Duv^r, —  to  make,  accomplish  (?). 

Duv^ra,  —  door,  court.      Skt.,  dvar<^;     Avest,  ^vata, 

Duv<3:rthi, — gate. 

Duvitat^rn^m, —  separately  (?),  for  a  long  ti7ne  {J). 

Duvitiy^^, —  second.  Skt.,  dvitiy^;  Avest.,  bity<^; 
Lat.,  duo,  bis;  Goth.,  tvai;  AS.,  twa;  Eng., 
two. 

Dushiyar^,  —  misfortune,  from  dush.  Skt.,  dus,  ill, 
and  yar<3;;    Avest.,  yare. 

TixaM^a, —  lie,  falsehood.      Cf.  duruj. 

T>xa\x\axia, — false,  deceiving, 

Dr<a;(n)g<3J,  —  a  long  time, 

N 

N^ib<3;, —  beautiful,  pretty. 

N<^iy, —  not. 

N^dit^bir<^, —  name  of  a  man  who  excited  opposition 

against  Darius  in  Babylon. 

N^pa, — grandson.  Skt.,  n^pat;  Avest.,  napat; 
Lat.,  nepo(t)s;    AS.,  nefa. 

N^bukudr^c^r<3;, —  name  of  a  Babylonian  king. 

N^bunit^^, —  name  of  the  last  Babylonian  king. 

N^v^m^, —  ninth.  Skt.,  n^v^m^;  Avest.,  n<?v^zn; 
Lat.,  novem;  Goth.,  niun;  AS.,  nigan;  Eng. , 
nine. 


177 

Nam^n, —  name.  Skt.,  nam^n;  Avest.,  nam^n; 
Lat.,  nomen;    Goth.,  namo;    Eng.,  name. 

Nau, —  ship.     Skt.,  naus;    Lat.,  navis. 

Nah<3:, —  nose.     Skt.,  nasa. 

Ni, —  to  conduct,  lead.     Skt.,  ni. 

Nij,  —  verbal  prefix, /r^w.      Skt.,  nis;     Avest.,  nish. 

Nip^d. —  loc.  nip^diy,  footprint,  on  foot.  Ni,  down 
(Skt.,  ni;  Lat.,  in;  AS.,  in),  and  p<^d,  foot  (Skt., 
p<^d;  Avest.,  p^dh^;  Lat.,  pe(d)s;  Goth.,  fotus; 
Eng.,  foot). 

Nisay^;?,  —  name  of  a  country  in  Media. 

Ny<2k^,  —  grandfather.      Avest.,  nyak^, 

Nur^m,  —  nozv. 

P 

P^^ishiyauvada, —  name  of  a  region. 

P^t, —  to  fall.      Skt.,  p^t;    Lat.,  peto. 

—  with  prefix  ud,  to  rise  up. 

YaXXy,  —  prep,  and  verbal  prefix.  \)  in  \  2)  against  \ 
3)  throughout.  Often  postpositive.  Skt.,  pr^ti; 
Avest.,  p<?iti. 

Ya\Skaxa, —  image,  effigy. 

P^tigr^^b^na, —  name  of  a  cit}^  in  Parthia. 

P^tiprt:d^m,  —  in  its  own  place.  From  p^tiy  (cf. 
above)  and  p^d  (cf.  nipcid). 

P^tish, —  with  ace,  tozuards.      Cf.  p<^tiy. 

P^thi,  —  way,  road.  Skt.,  p^-zth^^;  Avest.,  p^nth^n; 
Lat.,  pon(t)s;  Old  Germ.,  pad,  fad;  AS.,  padh; 
Eng.,  path. 

P^r^uv^,  —  eastern. 


178 

Taragay — name  of  a  Persian  mountain. 

"Parana, — former. 

Tara, —  prep.,  postpositive,  and  verbal  prefix,  from, 
backward.  Skt.,  p^ra;  Lat.,  per;  Goth.,  fra; 
Old  Germ.,  fer;  Germ.,  ver;  AS.,  for,  as  in 
Eng. ,  forgive. 

P^riy,  —  prep,  and  verbal  prefix,  around,  about,  con- 
cerning.     Skt.,  p^ri;    Avest.,  pairi. 

P^ru,  —  gen.  plur.,  p<3:runam  and  p<^ruvnam;  much, 
many.  Skt.,  puru;  Avest.,  pouru;  Lat.,  plus; 
Goth.,  filu;    Germ.,  viel. 

Yarwva,  —  anterior  eastern;  ace.  neut.,  paruv<a:m:  be- 
fore.     Avest.,  "^aoViXYa. 

YarMviya, —  before,  anterior',  in  abl.  sense,  h<7ca  p<«- 
ruviy^ta.      Skt.  Ved. ,  purvy^;    Avest.,  p/^ourvy^. 

P<3;ruz^n^, —  gen.  plur.,  p^ruz^nanam  and  p^ruvz^na- 
nam;  possessing  many  kiyids  of  peoples. 

Tarthava,  —  Parthia. 

P^rs, —  i)  to  ask',  2)  to  inquire  about  something. 
Skt.,  pr^ch;  Avest.,  p^res;  Lat.,  preco;  Goth., 
frah;    Germ.,  fragen. 

—  with  preceding  (h)u,  to  examine  carefully^ punish'y 
part.  (h)u-fr<2st^m. 

—  with  prefix  p^ti,  to  examine,  read. 
P^sa,  —  after. 

P^sav<3:, —  afterwards,  thereafter.      P^sa  and  av^. 

Pa, —  to  protect,  sustain.  Skt.,  pa;  Avest.,  pa;  Lat., 
pa-vi,  pa-scor. 

Patishuv^ri, —  a  race  inhabiting  a  portion  of  Persia. 

Pars^, —  Persia,  Persiaft. 


179 

Titar, — father.  Skt.,  pitr;  Avest.,  pit^;  Lat.,  pa- 
ter; Goth.,  fadar;  Germ.,  vater;  AS.,  faeder; 
Eng.,  father.      Cf.  pa. 

Pish, —  to  scrape,  graze.      Skt.,  pish;    Lat.,  pinso. 

—  with  prefix  ni,  to  zurite  on. 

Pirav^.  —  Nile. 

Putiy^,  —  name  of  a  people. 

Putr^,  —  son.  Skt.,  putr<^;  Avest.,  puthr^;  Lat., 
puer  (.''). 


¥ra, — verbal  prefix,  before,  for.     Skt,  pr^;    Avest., 
ira]    Lat.,  pro;    Eng.,  fore. 

Fr^^t^m^, — first,  leader. 

Fr^mana,  —  authority,  command,  precepts. 

Fr^v^rti,  —  proper  name,  PJiraortes. 

Fr^h^rv^m, —  ace.  neut.  in  adverbial  sense,  altogether. 
From  fr^  and  h^rv^:,  h^ruv^. 

Frad^,  —  name  of  a  ruler  in  Margia. 


B^g^,  —  god.      Skt.,  bh<^g^;    Avest.,  b^gh^;     Goth., 
ga-bigs. 

B^g^bukhsh<^, —  name  of  one  of  those  who  with  Da- 
rius dethroned  false  Smerdis;    Megabyzos. 

B^gabign^,  —  name  of  a  Persian. 

B^(n)d, —  to    bind,        Skt.,    b^ndh;      Avest.,    b^nd; 
Goth.,  bindan;    Eng.,  bind. 

B<^(n)d<3:k<2, —  subject,  servant. 


i8o 

B^r, —  to  bear ^  sustain^  protect,  Skt. ,  bhr;  Avest. , 
b^r;  Lat.,  fero;  Goth.,  bairan;  AS.,  beran; 
Eng.,  bear. 

—  with  prefix  p^ti,  to  bring  back^  replace^  restore. 

—  with  p^ra,  to  bear  azvay. 

—  with  iva,  to  carry  off,  assign. 

B^rdiy^,  —  name  of  the  brother  of  Cambyses,  Smerdis. 

Bakhtri, —  Bactria. 

Bag^yadi, —  name  of  a  month. 

Baji, —  tribute',    from  root  \>a).        Skt.,  bh^j,  to  allot. 

Babiru, — Babylon. 

Babiruviy^, —  Babylonian. 

Bu, —  to  be.  Skt.,  bhu;  Avest.,  bu;  Lat.,  fuo,  fui, 
perhaps  bam  (in  amabam);  AS.,  beom;  Germ., 
bin;    Eng.,  be. 

Bumi, — ground,  earth.     Skt.,  bhumi;    Avest.,  bumi. 

Brat^r, —  brother.  Skt.,  bhratr;  Avest.,  brat<7r; 
Lat.,  frater;  Goth.,  brothar;  AS.,  brodher; 
Eng.,  brother. 

M 

yidka, —  name  of  a  people. 

yiagu,  —  Magian,  a  Median  people  from  whom  the 
priests  were  elected. 

M^ciy^, —  name  of  a  people. 

M^thisht^, —  the  greatest,  leader. 

yian,  —  to  thijik.  ponder.  Skt.,  m^n;  Avest.,  m^n; 
Lat.,  mens;    Germ.,  meinen. 

M^zn, —  to  remain.     Avest.,  man;    Lat.,  maneo. 


I8i 

M^r, —  to  die.  Skt.,  mr;  Avest.,  m^r;  Lat.,  mo- 
rior;    AS.,  mordh. 

M^irgu, —  name  of  a  region  east  and  north  of  Areia. 

M^rtiy^, —  i)  mortal,  man\  cf.  vaax  above.  2)  name 
of  a  man  who  excited  a  tumult  against  Darius. 
In  P.  the  gen.  sing,  is  contracted  to  m^rtihy^a:. 

M^a-rduniy^, —  name  of  a  man,  Mardoniiis. 

Ma, —  to  measure.  Skt.,  ma;  Avest.,  ma;  Lat., 
meto. 

—  with   prefix   a,   past   part.,   am^t^,   tested^  triedy 
prolonged. 

Ma,  —  prohibitive  particle,  72^/.    Skt. ,  ma;  Avest.,  ma. 

Maty^, —  that  not,  lest. 

Mad^, —  Median,  Media. 

Maniy<3:, — place  of  remaining,  dwelling.      Qi.  m^zn. 

Marg^y^  or  Marg<2v^,  —  Margianian. 

Mah^,  —  montJr,  contracted  gen.  mahya.  Skt.,  mas^; 
Lat.,  mensis;    AS.,  mona;    Eng.,  month. 

M(i)thr^, —  name  of  a  Persian  God. 

Mudray^, —  Egypt',    nom.  plur.,  Egyptians. 

Y 

Y^una, —  Ionian,  Ionia.      Skt.,  Y^v^n^. 

Y^tha, —  i)  as,  when;  2)  because',  3)  in  order  that^ 
that.     From  rel.  root,  ya. 

Y<a:da, —  duty. 

Y<3:diy, —  i)  ^y*;    2^  when.     Skt.,  y^di;    Avest.,  yedhi. 

—  with  p^diy,  if  perchance. 
Y^n^iy, —  (i') 


1 82 

Yata, — i)  during,  while)  2)  until.   From  rel.  root,  ya. 
Yan^, — favor.     Avest.,  yan<3;. 
Yava, —  as  long  as.     Skt.,  yav<^t. 
Yutiya,  —  name  of  a  region  in  Persia. 
Yuviya, —  canal. 


R^uc^,  —  ace.  sing.,  rauca;  day.  Connected  with 
Skt. ,  rue,  to  shine;  Lat.,  luceo;  AS.,  leoht; 
Eng.,  light. 

R^ut^, —  river. 

Rrtkha, —  name  of  a  city  in  Persia. 

R^ga, —  name  of  a  district  in  Media. 

R^d(?),— Skt,  r^h. 

—  with  prefix  av^,  to  relinquish,  leave. 

R<7s, —  to  come.  Desiderative:  cf.  Brugmann  in  idg. 
Forsch.,  p.  173  (1892). 

—  with  prefix  p<^ra,  to  arrive. 

—  with  prefix  ni,  to  descend. 
Rad, — joy,  delight. 

—  loc.  sing.,  radiy  with  gen.,  for  the  sake  of 

—  av<^hyaradiy,  for  the  sake  of  this  thing,  for  this 
reason. 

Rast^,  —  right. 

V 

V^in, —  to  see,  behold.  The  middle  is  used  in  the 
passive  sense.      Avest.,  vaen. 

V^umis^, —  name  of  a  Persian. 


i83 

V^j, —  to  lead.     Skt.,  v^h;  Avest.,  vaz\    AS.,  wegan. 

V^y^spar^, —  name  of  a  Persian. 

V^r,  —  to  declare,  make  {o7te)  believe^  convince, 

V^rkan^,  —  Hyrcania. 

Yardana, —  nom.  sing.,  v^rd^n^m,  fortified  town,, 
city,  state.  Connected  with  Skt.  vr  dh,  to  increase; 
Avest.,  va-red;    AS.,  waldan,  weald. 

V^siy, —  much,  very,  greatly.  (Possibly  connected 
with  Greek  incoVy  "nach  Wunsch".  Barthol- 
omae). 

V^shn^, —  desire,  power,  grace.    Cf.  v^s,  to  desire. 

Vrtzr^k^,  —  great. 

Yahyazdata, —  name  of  a  man  who  excited  a  tumult 
against  Darius  Hystaspes. 

Vrt:h^uk<^,  —  name  of  a  Persian. 

Va,  —  enclitic  particle,  or.     Skt.,  va;    Lat.,  ve. 

Vith, —  i)  clan;    2)  race,  fellow. 

Vithiy^,  —  pertaining  to  the  same  race. 

Vithin(i'), —  possessifig  the  same  race.  The  instr. 
plur.  vithibish,  which  alone  justifies  the  sup- 
position of  the  existence  of  this  adjective,  I  have 
explained  in  grammar  (86,  c)  as  from  noun  vith. 

V\da,—  {J) 

Vid<3:rn^, —  name  of  a  Persian. 

Vi(n)d^fra, —  name  of  a  Mede. 

Vi(n)drtfr^na, —  name  of  a  Persian. 

Viy^khn^, —  name  of  a  month. 

Viy<3:t^r^y^m, — see  t^r. 

Vivan^, —  name  of  a  Persian. 


1 84 

Vis^,  —  all,  every,     Skt.,  vi9va. 

Vis<3:d<7hyu, —  ace.  sing,  ra'3.'=>z.v\sa^a\iy\xv(\,  possessing 
all  provinces. 

V\s>i^azax\a, —  g-en.  plur.  masc.  visp<3:zanam,  possessing 
all  kinds  of  peoples. 

Vishtasp<3:,  —  Hystaspes,  the  father  of  Darius. 

S 

Saka,  —  Scyth ian,  Scyth ia. 

S<2ku(n)k<7,  —  name  of  a  man  who  excited  opposition 
among  the  Sakae  against  Darius   Hystaspes. 

S^n,— (.?) 

—  with  prefix  vi,  to  destroy. 
^av,—  to  kill.ij) 

Sik^y^uv^ti, —  name  of  a  fortress  in  Media. 

Sugud<^, —  Sogdiana. 

Skudr^, —  name  of  a  people. 

St(3;r, —  to  sin.Q) 

Sta, —  to  stand.  Skt.,  stha;  Avest.,  sta;  Lat.,  sta-re; 
AS.,  standan;    Eng.,  stand. 

—  with  prefix  av^  (caus.),  to  establish,  constitute. 

—  with  ni  (caus.),  to  enjoin,  command. 
Stan^, — place. 

Sp<2;rd^, —  name  of  a  people. 

Sh 

Sh^  and  Shi, —  stem  of  a  pron.  end.,  3  pers.  Skt., 
s^;  Avest.,  he.  (Cf.  Wackernagel,  iibcr  ein  Ge- 
setz  der  idg.  Wortstellung,  idg.  Forsch.,  p.  404 
[1892]). 


185 

Sharastihara, —  hozv-bearer\  or  perhaps  for  arshti- 
\iaxa,  spcar-bearer. 

Shiyati,  —  spirit,  intelligence,  wisdom.  (J)  (shay<7- 
tim,  P.) 

Shiyu, —  to  go,  set  out. 

Shugud^?, —  see  Sugud^. 

Z 

7.axa{x\)Va, —  Drangiana. 

Z<7zan<7, —  name  of  a  fortified  town  near  Babylon. 

Zur^, — power. 

Zuvakara,  —  despot.      From  zur^  (see  above)  and  kara 

(see  krtr). 

H 

H<7ina. —  army.      Skt.,  sena;    Avest. ,  haen^. 

H^uv, —  tJiis.      Skt.,  a-sau;    Avest.  hau. 

H^kham^ni, —  Ac h aeme nes,  ox\^\vi?i\.or  oi  \.\\^  race  of 
the  Achaemenides. 

H<?kham^nishiy(^, —  of  the  race  of  Achaemenides. 

H^ngmrt:tan<7, —  Ecbata?ia;  leading  city  of  Media,  at 
the  foot  of  the  mountains  of  Alvend.  From 
hrt-m  (together),  and  g<7m  (to  go). 

Hrtca,  —  prep,  with  ablative, /?'^;>^.      Avest.,  hac-ei. 

Hrt'(n)j, —  to  draw    throiv. 

—  with  fr^;,  to  throw  forth. 

H^7d, —  to  sit.  Skt.,  s^d;  Avest.,  hrtd;  Lat.,  sedeo; 
AS.,  sittan;    Eng. ,   sit. 

—  witn  prefix  ni  (caus.),  to  constitute,  establish. 


1 86 

H^da, —  prep,  with  instrumental,  witJi.  Skt.,  ?>a\\a\ 
Avest.,  \\a<\\\a. 

H^dish, — place,  dwelling,  royal  scat,  palace.    Cf.  h<7d. 

H^(n)duga, —  edict. 

Waxi(X\\.a, —  name  of  a  Babylonian. 

Y\.avs\, —  verbal   prefix,    together    with.        Skt.,    s<7m: 

Avest.,  h^m. 
H<7m^, —  together,    all.       Skt.,  s^^m^:;     Avest.,  \\.avc\a. 

Lat.,  simul;     Goth.,  sama;     Germ.,    zusammen; 

AS.,  same. 

H^mrt-pitrtir,  —  having  a  co^nmon  father.  From  h^m^ 
and  pit<^r. 

Yiavaara, —  ivar.      Skt.,  s^^m^-r^;. 

Wavciaxawa,  —  nom.  and  ace.  sing.,  h^m^r^rn^'rm;  con- 
flict, battle. 

H^mat^r, —  having  a  conimo7i  mother.  From  h^m 
and  mrtJt^r.  Skt.,  matr;  Lat.,  mater;  Fng., 
mother.      Cf.  ma. 

WamitrWa, —  rebellious. 

Viavdiwa, —  name  of  a  country.  Area. 

H^r^uv^ti, —  loc.  Waxa\xva\.a\y2i,  Arachosia. 

Hrt-ruv^, —  all,  every.  Skt.,  s^rv^;  Avest.,  h^^ruv^?; 
Lat.,  salvus. 

H^shitiyrt', —  rebellious. 

H^shiy/^, —  neut.  h^-shiy^m,  trtie. 

Hin(d)u, —  India;  region  near  the  river  Indus.  Skt., 
sindhu;    Avest.,  hindu. 

Hum^v^rk^,  —  appellation  of  the  race  of  the  Scythians. 

Hyap^r^, —  ace.  in  adverbial  sense;   also   witfj   R^tiy, 

again.      From  hy^  and  2c^axa.  il  Q  d  ^  1^  *- 


U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDMb77EDlb 


